Furuno SONAR FSV 84 User Manual

COLOR SCANNING SONAR  
FSV-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The paper used in this manual  
is elemental chlorine free.  
FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer  
9-52 Ashihara-cho,  
Nishinomiya 662-8580, JAPAN  
Telephone : 0798-65-2111  
Fax  
0798-65-4200  
:
FIRST EDITION : SEP. 2006  
Printed in Japan  
All rights reserved.  
B
: FEB. 20, 2007  
Pub. No. OME-13290  
( DAMI )  
FSV-84  
*00015742711*  
*00015742711*  
* 0 0 0 1 5 7 4 2 7 1 1 *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT NOTICES  
This manual is intended for use by native speakers of English.  
No part of this manual may be copied or reproduced without written permission.  
If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.  
The contents of this manual and equipment specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual may not match the screens  
you see on your display. The screen you see depends on your system configuration and  
equipment settings.  
Store this manual in a convenient place for future reference.  
FURUNO will assume no responsibility for the damage caused by improper use or  
modification of the equipment (including software) by an unauthorized agent or a third  
party.  
When it is time to discard this product it must be done according to local regulations for  
disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in the USA, refer to the Electronics Industries  
Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/).  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
The operator of this equipment must read the safety instructions before attempting to operate  
the equipment.  
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in  
DANGER  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
death or serious injury.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,  
could result in death or serious injury.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,  
may result in minor or moderate injury.  
Warning, Caution  
Mandatory Action  
Prohibitive Action  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble or modify the  
equipment.  
DANGER  
Keep away from raise/ower  
shaft in hull unit when it is  
moving.  
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can  
result.  
Gears in hull unit will cause seriou  
injury.  
Do not install the equipment where it  
may be subject to rain or water splash.  
Fire or electrical shock can result if water  
leaks in the equipment.  
WARNING  
Do not open the equipment.  
Use the proper fuse.  
Only qualified personnel should work  
inside the equipment.  
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage  
to the equipment or cause fire.  
Immediately turn off the power at the  
switchboard if water leaks into the  
equipment or something is dropped  
into the equipment.  
Do not operate the equipment with  
wet hands.  
Electrical shock may result.  
Continued use of the equipment can cause  
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO  
agent for service.  
Do not place liquid-filled containers on  
the top of the equipment.  
Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid  
spills into the equipment.  
Immediately turn off the power at the  
switchboard if the equipment is emitting  
smoke or fire.  
Turn off the power immediately  
if you feel the equipment is behaving  
abnormally.  
Continued use of the equipment can cause  
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO  
agent for service.  
Turn off the power at the switchboard if  
the equipment becomes abnormally warm  
or is emitting odd noises. Contact a  
FURUNO dealer or agent for advice.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Maximum speed while the transducer is  
projected and being raised or lowered  
is as below, to prevent damage to the  
transducer.  
Observe the following precautions when  
using industrial use lubricant.  
Precautions  
Q
Keep lubricant away from eyes. Wear protective  
goggles when working with the lubricant.  
The lubricant can cause inflammation of the eyes.  
Do not touch the lubricant. Wear protective gloves  
when working with the lubricant. The lubricant can  
cause inflammation of the skin.  
Projected Raising/  
Lowering  
Q
800 mm stroke Max. 18 kt Max. 15 kt  
1100 mm stroke Max. 18 kt Max. 15 kt  
Q
Q
Do not ingest the lubricant. Diarrhea and vomiting  
may result.  
Keep the lubricant out of reach of children.  
Replace anticorrosion zinc plate yearly.  
Emergency procedures  
Q
If the lubricant enters eyes, flush with clean water  
about 15 minutes. Consult a physician.  
If the lubricant contacts skin, flush area with clean  
water.  
Corrosion between the main shaft and  
transducer may result if not replaced, allowing  
water leakage and/or loss of transducer.  
Q
Q
If the lubricant is ingested, see a physician  
immediately.  
Disposal of lubricant and its container  
Dispose of the lubricant and its container in accord-  
ance with local regulations. If you are unclear about  
the disposal procedure, contact a FURUNO agent or  
dealer for advice.  
WARNING LABELS  
Warning labels are attached to the units of the system. Do not remove the labels.  
If a label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement.  
DANGER  
DANGER  
Electrical shock hazard.  
Keep fingers away  
from gears.  
Shaft may cause injury.  
Keep away froom  
moving shaft.  
Do not remove cover.  
No user-serviceable parts inside.  
Turn off power before servicing.  
And wait until charge lamp (green)  
goes off and then remove cover.  
Name: Warning Label  
Type: 10-071-5313  
Code No.: 100-291-160  
Name: Warning Label  
Type: 10-079-6144  
Code No.: 100-310-880  
WARNING  
To avoid electrical shock, do not  
remove cover. No user-serviceable  
parts inside.  
WARNING  
To avoid electrical shock,  
do not remove cover.  
No user-serviceable parts  
inside.  
Name: Warning Label (2)  
Type: 03-129-1001-1  
Code No.: 100-236-741  
Name: Warning Label (1)  
Type: 86-003-1011-1  
Code No.: 100-236-231  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
This page intentionally left blank.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
FOREWORD ..........................................................................................................xi  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION................................................................................xiii  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .........................................................................1-1  
1.1  
1.2  
Control Description ................................................................................................1-1  
Turning the Power On/Off......................................................................................1-2  
1.2.1 Turning the power on ...................................................................................1-2  
1.2.2 Turning the power off ...................................................................................1-2  
Lowering, Raising the Transducer.........................................................................1-3  
1.3.1 Lowering the transducer...............................................................................1-3  
1.3.2 Raising the transducer.................................................................................1-3  
Screen Brilliance....................................................................................................1-3  
Control Panel Dimmer ...........................................................................................1-4  
Display Mode, Display Division .............................................................................1-6  
1.6.1 Selecting a display mode .............................................................................1-6  
1.6.2 Sample display mode pictures .....................................................................1-7  
Adjusting the Gain................................................................................................1-13  
Menu Overview....................................................................................................1-14  
1.3  
1.4  
1.5  
1.6  
1.7  
1.8  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE ....................................................................................2-1  
2.1  
2.2  
Basic Operating Procedure ...................................................................................2-1  
Indications and Marks............................................................................................2-2  
2.2.1 Horizontal mode...........................................................................................2-2  
2.2.2 Horizontal2 mode.........................................................................................2-3  
Display Range........................................................................................................2-7  
Tilt Angle.................................................................................................................2-8  
2.4.1 Setting the tilt angle .....................................................................................2-8  
2.4.2 Automatic tilt ................................................................................................2-9  
2.4.3 Relation between bottom echo and tilt angle.............................................. 2-11  
2.4.4 Tilt angle for surface fish............................................................................2-12  
2.4.5 Suitable tilt angle........................................................................................2-13  
Measuring Range and Bearing to a Target .........................................................2-14  
Eliminating Weak Echoes....................................................................................2-15  
Suppressing Bottom Tail......................................................................................2-17  
2.7.1 Adjust AGC................................................................................................2-17  
2.7.2 Decrease pulse length ...............................................................................2-18  
2.7.3 Adjust 2nd AGC...........................................................................................2-18  
2.7.4 Adjust Near AGC........................................................................................2-19  
Suppressing Bottom and Sea Surface Reflections in Shallow Waters ..............2-20  
Rejecting Sonar Interference and Noise.............................................................2-21  
2.9.1 Identifying noise source .............................................................................2-21  
2.9.2 Interference rejector...................................................................................2-21  
2.9.3 Changing Tx interval..................................................................................2-22  
2.9.4 Shifting Tx frequency .................................................................................2-22  
2.9.5 Noise limiter...............................................................................................2-23  
2.3  
2.4  
2.5  
2.6  
2.7  
2.8  
2.9  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
2.9.6 Echo average............................................................................................ 2-23  
2.9.7 Reverberation reduction ............................................................................ 2-23  
2.9.8 Setting reference bearing for frequency change ........................................ 2-23  
2.9.9 Suppressing gain of bottom echo .............................................................. 2-23  
2.9.10 Sidelobe suppression............................................................................... 2-24  
2.10 Adjusting Beamwidth...........................................................................................2-25  
2.11 Tracking a Fish School (target lock) ...................................................................2-26  
2.11.1 Selecting target lock type......................................................................... 2-26  
2.11.2 Fish school tracking mode ....................................................................... 2-27  
2.11.3 Position tracking mode............................................................................. 2-28  
2.11.4 TARGET LOCK menu.............................................................................. 2-29  
2.12 Detecting Fish Schools Aurally ...........................................................................2-30  
2.12.1 Selecting direction ................................................................................... 2-30  
2.12.2 Selecting audio sector ............................................................................. 2-31  
2.12.3 Automatic training.................................................................................... 2-32  
2.12.4 Reverberation.......................................................................................... 2-32  
2.13 Presentation Mode ..............................................................................................2-33  
2.13.1 Presentation mode description ................................................................ 2-33  
2.13.2 How to select a presentation mode.......................................................... 2-34  
2.14 Fish Alarm............................................................................................................2-35  
2.15 Relocating Fish School for Easy Observation....................................................2-37  
2.16 Comparing Fish School Concentration...............................................................2-38  
2.17 Measuring Fish School Speed ............................................................................2-39  
2.17.1 Entering fish marks.................................................................................. 2-39  
2.17.2 Deleting fish marks.................................................................................. 2-40  
2.18 Event Mark, Own Ship Position Mark .................................................................2-41  
2.18.1 Entering an event mark............................................................................ 2-41  
2.18.2 Entering an own ship position mark......................................................... 2-42  
2.18.3 Deleting an event mark, own ship position mark...................................... 2-42  
2.19 Net Course Mark .................................................................................................2-44  
2.20 Observing Net Behavior......................................................................................2-45  
2.21 Storing, Recalling Picture....................................................................................2-46  
2.21.1 Storing the picture.................................................................................... 2-46  
2.21.2 Recalling stored picture........................................................................... 2-46  
2.22 OTHERS Menu....................................................................................................2-47  
2.22.1 Displaying the OTHERS menu ................................................................ 2-47  
2.22.2 OTHERS menu description ..................................................................... 2-48  
2.23 Interpreting the Horizontal Display......................................................................2-51  
2.23.1 Bottom echoes ........................................................................................ 2-51  
2.23.2 Fish schools ............................................................................................ 2-52  
2.23.3 Sea surface reflections............................................................................ 2-53  
2.23.4 Wake....................................................................................................... 2-53  
2.23.5 Sidelobe echoes (false echoes)............................................................... 2-54  
2.23.6 Noise and interference............................................................................. 2-54  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
3. VERTICAL MODE..........................................................................................3-1  
3.1  
3.2  
Basic Operating Procedure ...................................................................................3-1  
Vertical Mode Concept...........................................................................................3-2  
3.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................3-2  
3.2.2 Setting the vertical display ...........................................................................3-2  
Vertical Mode Indications and Marks.....................................................................3-3  
3.3.1 Typical vertical display .................................................................................3-3  
3.3.2 Vertical bearing mark, tilt mark.....................................................................3-4  
3.3.3 Trackball mark position reference mark........................................................3-5  
Auto Train...............................................................................................................3-5  
Display Range........................................................................................................3-6  
Measuring the Range ............................................................................................3-6  
Eliminating Weak Echoes......................................................................................3-7  
Suppressing Bottom Tail......................................................................................3-10  
3.8.1 Adjust AGC................................................................................................3-10  
3.8.2 Decrease pulse length ...............................................................................3-10  
3.8.3 Adjust 2nd AGC........................................................................................... 3-11  
3.8.4 Adjust Near AGC........................................................................................ 3-11  
Rejecting Interference and Noise........................................................................3-12  
3.9.1 Identifying noise source .............................................................................3-12  
3.9.2 Interference rejector...................................................................................3-12  
3.9.3 Noise limiter...............................................................................................3-13  
3.9.4 Shifting Tx frequency .................................................................................3-13  
3.9.5 Echo average.............................................................................................3-13  
3.9.6 Reverberation reduction.............................................................................3-13  
3.9.7 Suppressing gain of bottom echo...............................................................3-14  
3.9.8 Suppressing sidelobes...............................................................................3-14  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.6  
3.7  
3.8  
3.9  
3.10 Adjusting Beamwidth ...........................................................................................3-15  
3.11 Vertical Expansion Display ..................................................................................3-16  
3.12 OTHERS Menu....................................................................................................3-17  
3.12.1 Displaying the OTHERS menu.................................................................3-17  
3.12.2 OTHERS menu description......................................................................3-18  
3.13 Application to Bonito and Tuna Fishing...............................................................3-21  
3.13.1 Searching.................................................................................................3-21  
3.13.2 Tracking...................................................................................................3-21  
3.13.3 Approaching.............................................................................................3-21  
3.13.4 Catching...................................................................................................3-22  
4. SLANT MODE................................................................................................4-1  
4.1  
4.2  
Basic Operating Procedure ...................................................................................4-1  
Indications and Marks............................................................................................4-2  
4.2.1 Slant mode single display ............................................................................4-2  
4.2.2 Slant mode combination display...................................................................4-3  
Display Range........................................................................................................4-7  
Tilt Angle.................................................................................................................4-8  
4.4.1 Setting the tilt angle .....................................................................................4-8  
4.4.2 Automatic tilt ................................................................................................4-9  
Auto Training........................................................................................................4-11  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
Measuring Range and Bearing to a Target......................................................... 4-11  
Eliminating Weak Echoes....................................................................................4-12  
Suppressing Bottom Tail......................................................................................4-14  
4.8.1 Adjust AGC................................................................................................ 4-14  
4.8.2 Decrease pulse length............................................................................... 4-15  
4.8.3 Adjust 2nd AGC .......................................................................................... 4-15  
4.8.4 Adjust Near AGC....................................................................................... 4-16  
Suppressing Bottom and Sea Surface Reflections in Shallow Waters..............4-17  
4.9  
4.10 Rejecting Sonar Interference and Noise.............................................................4-18  
4.10.1 Identifying noise source........................................................................... 4-18  
4.10.2 Interference rejector ................................................................................ 4-18  
4.10.3 Changing Tx interval................................................................................ 4-19  
4.10.4 Shifting TX frequency............................................................................. 4-19  
4.10.5 Noise limiter............................................................................................. 4-20  
4.10.6 Echo average .......................................................................................... 4-20  
4.10.7 Reverberation reduction .......................................................................... 4-20  
4.10.8 Suppressing gain of bottom echo ............................................................ 4-20  
4.10.9 Suppressing sidelobes............................................................................. 4-20  
4.11 Adjusting Beamwidth...........................................................................................4-21  
4.12 Tracking a Fish School (target lock) ...................................................................4-22  
4.12.1 Selecting target lock type......................................................................... 4-22  
4.12.2 Fish school tracking mode....................................................................... 4-23  
4.12.3 Position tracking mode ............................................................................ 4-24  
4.12.4 TARGET LOCK menu.............................................................................. 4-25  
4.13 Detecting Fish Schools Aurally ...........................................................................4-26  
4.13.1 Selecting direction ................................................................................... 4-26  
4.13.2 Selecting audio sector ............................................................................. 4-27  
4.13.3 Reverberation.......................................................................................... 4-27  
4.14 Offcenter ..............................................................................................................4-28  
4.14.1 Manual offcenter...................................................................................... 4-28  
4.14.2 Automatic offcenter.................................................................................. 4-29  
4.15 Fish Alarm............................................................................................................4-30  
4.16 Comparing Fish School Concentration...............................................................4-32  
4.17 Measuring Fish School Speed ............................................................................4-33  
4.17.1 Entering fish marks.................................................................................. 4-33  
4.17.2 Deleting fish marks.................................................................................. 4-34  
4.18 Event Mark, Own Ship Position Mark .................................................................4-35  
4.18.1 Entering an event mark............................................................................ 4-35  
4.18.2 Entering an own ship position mark......................................................... 4-36  
4.18.3 Deleting an event mark, own ship position mark...................................... 4-36  
4.19 Net Course Mark .................................................................................................4-38  
4.20 Observing Net Behavior......................................................................................4-39  
4.21 OTHERS Menu....................................................................................................4-40  
4.21.1 Displaying the OTHERS menu ................................................................ 4-40  
4.21.2 OTHERS menu description ..................................................................... 4-41  
4.22 Interpreting the Slant Display..............................................................................4-44  
4.22.1 Bottom echoes ........................................................................................ 4-44  
4.22.2 Fish schools ............................................................................................ 4-45  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
4.22.3 Sea surface reflections.............................................................................4-46  
4.22.4 Wake........................................................................................................4-46  
4.22.5 False echo by sidelobe ............................................................................4-47  
4.22.6 Noise and interference.............................................................................4-47  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE ..............................................................................5-1  
5.1  
5.2  
Basic Operating Procedure ...................................................................................5-1  
Typical Echo Sounder Displays.............................................................................5-2  
5.2.1 Echo sounder 1 display................................................................................5-2  
5.2.2 Echo sounder 2 (net recorder or echo sounder) display...............................5-3  
5.2.3 Echo sounder combination mode (ES1 + ES2) ............................................5-4  
Selecting an Echo Sounder Mode.........................................................................5-6  
Selecting Display Range........................................................................................5-8  
Adjusting the Gain................................................................................................5-10  
Picture Advance Speed........................................................................................5-11  
Measuring Depth, Distance .................................................................................5-12  
Comparing Fish School Concentration ...............................................................5-13  
ES1 SETTING Menu Overview...........................................................................5-15  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
5.6  
5.7  
5.8  
5.9  
5.10 ES2 SETTING Menu Overview...........................................................................5-16  
6. HISTORY MODE............................................................................................6-1  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
Basic Operating Procedure ...................................................................................6-1  
Sample History Display..........................................................................................6-2  
How to Interpret, Set the History Display ..............................................................6-3  
6.3.1 Interpreting the history display .....................................................................6-3  
6.3.2 Setting the history marker ............................................................................6-4  
6.3.3 Setting the width of the history marker .........................................................6-5  
6.3.4 Setting the picture advance mode................................................................6-6  
7. NUMERIC/GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY ..........................................................7-1  
7.1  
7.2  
7.3  
Full Numeric/Graphic Data Display .......................................................................7-1  
Abbreviated Numeric/Graphic Data Display .........................................................7-2  
Numeric/Graphic Data Description........................................................................7-3  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT................................................................8-1  
8.1  
User Menu..............................................................................................................8-1  
8.1.1 Deleting items from user menu ....................................................................8-1  
8.1.2 Programming the user menu........................................................................8-2  
Function Keys (F1-F6)...........................................................................................8-4  
8.2.1 Executing a function.....................................................................................8-4  
8.2.2 Programming function keys..........................................................................8-6  
8.2.3 Erasing programs.........................................................................................8-7  
USER PROG Control.............................................................................................8-8  
8.3.1 Selecting a user program.............................................................................8-8  
8.3.2 Programming the USER PROG control........................................................8-8  
8.2  
8.3  
9. OTHERS MENU.............................................................................................9-1  
9.1  
9.2  
ERASE MARKS menu...........................................................................................9-1  
DISPLAY SETTING menu .....................................................................................9-2  
9.2.1 Opening the DISPLAY SETTING menu........................................................9-2  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
9.2.2 DISPLAY SETTING menu description ......................................................... 9-2  
9.3  
9.4  
9.5  
ALARM & AUDIO menu ........................................................................................9-4  
9.3.1 Opening the ALARM & AUDIO menu........................................................... 9-4  
9.3.2 ALARM & AUDIO menu description............................................................. 9-4  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu.........................................................................9-5  
9.4.1 Opening the PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu............................................ 9-5  
9.4.2 PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu description.............................................. 9-5  
INITIAL SETTING menu........................................................................................9-6  
9.5.1 Opening the INITIAL SETTING menu.......................................................... 9-6  
9.5.2 INITIAL SETTING menu description............................................................ 9-6  
10. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS .................................................................10-1  
10.1 Storing Image, Configuration...............................................................................10-1  
10.2 Loading, Deleting Files........................................................................................10-3  
10.3 Formatting Memory Cards ..................................................................................10-4  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................11-1  
11.1 Preventive Maintenance...................................................................................... 11-1  
11.2 Hull Unit Maintenance ......................................................................................... 11-2  
11.3 Fuse Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-3  
11.4 Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 11-4  
11.5 Warning Messages.............................................................................................. 11-5  
11.6 Error Codes ......................................................................................................... 11-6  
11.7 Status Messages................................................................................................. 11-7  
11.8 Tests..................................................................................................................... 11-7  
11.8.1 TEST menu...............................................................................................11-7  
11.8.2 Board test .................................................................................................11-8  
11.8.3 Panel test................................................................................................11-10  
11.8.4 Test pattern.............................................................................................11-11  
11.8.5 Rx test (For service technician)...............................................................11-12  
11.8.6 Noise test (For service technician)..........................................................11-12  
11.9 Raising the Transducer from the Hull Unit........................................................ 11-13  
11.9.1 Raising the transducer automatically ......................................................11-13  
11.9.2 Raising the transducer manually.............................................................11-14  
MENU TREE......................................................................................................AP-1  
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................................SP-1  
INDEX.................................................................................................................IN-1  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOREWORD  
A Word to the Owner of the FURUNO FSV-84  
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FSV-84 Color Scanning Sonar.  
We are confident you will see why the FURUNO name has become synonymous  
with quality and reliability.  
For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable  
reputation for quality marine electronics equipment. This dedication to  
excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers.  
This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of  
the marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function  
unless operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the  
recommended procedures for operation and maintenance.  
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment.  
Features  
The FSV-84 is a full-circle, multibeam electronic color scanning sonar which  
detects and displays fish schools on a 21-inch non-glare, high-resolution color  
monitor. (System also available without monitor.)  
The main features of the FSV-84 are  
Cylindrical + sphere transducer provides 90 degrees vertical detection.  
Vivid 32-color echo strength dependent display for improved recognition of  
bottom, fish school concentration, distribution and volume.  
Fish schools can be searched from horizontal (range direction), vertical (depth  
direction) with vertical and half-circle features.  
Function keys for direct access to desired menu item.  
User programs for one-touch setup of equipment.  
Menu-driven operation.  
Fish histogram shows signal strength distribution of echo within estimate  
mark.  
Various marks and alphanumeric fishing and navigation information for  
intuitive operation.  
Memory cards for storage and replay of picture and settings.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOREWORD  
Audio function allows monitoring of echoes along user-selected area through  
built-in loudspeaker.  
Fish mark estimates fish speed.  
Fish estimate feature compares volume of two fish schools.  
Target lock automatically tracks fish school.  
Net course mark shows probable drift of net against tide.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
System with locally supplied monitor  
CONTROL UNIT  
FSV-8401  
External  
Monitor  
External equipment  
Option  
AD Converter  
AD-100  
CONTROL UNIT  
FSV-8401  
Speed Log  
Loudspeaker  
Current  
Indicator  
Speed Log  
Echo Sounder,  
Current Indicator,  
other  
E/S Interface  
VI-1100A  
PROCESOR UNIT  
FSV-8402  
Navigator 1  
Navigator 2  
Net Recorder  
VI-1100A  
Net Sonde  
Junction Box  
CS-170  
VI-1100A  
External  
Interface CS-120A  
(Note 1)  
Net Sonde  
220 VAC,  
3φ, 50/60 Hz  
100-115/  
220-230 VAC,  
1φ, 50/60 Hz  
HULL UNIT  
FSV-8432  
FSV-8442  
TRANSCEIVER UNIT  
FSV-841A  
Satellite  
Compass  
SC-50/110  
100/110/115/  
220/230 VAC,  
1φ, 50/60 Hz  
Note 1: Power Kit (option, installed in  
processor unit) required to connect CS-120A.  
Blackbox type configuration  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
System with FURUNO monitor  
CONTROL UNIT  
FSV-8401  
MONITOR  
UNIT  
FSV-2400  
External equipment  
Option  
AD Converter  
AD-100  
CONTROL UNIT  
FSV-8401  
Speed Log  
Loudspeaker  
Sub Monitor  
Current  
Indicator  
Speed Log  
Echo Sounder,  
Current Indicator,  
other  
E/S Interface  
VI-1100A  
PROCESSOR UNIT  
FSV-8402  
Navigator 1  
Navigator 2  
Net Recorder  
VI-1100A  
E/S Interface  
VI-1100A  
Net Sonde  
Junction Box  
CS-170  
External  
Interface CS-120A  
(Note 1)  
Net Sonde  
100-115/  
220-230 VAC,  
1φ, 50/60 Hz  
220 VAC,  
3φ, 50/60 Hz  
HULL UNIT  
FSV-8432  
FSV-8442  
TRANSCEIVER UNIT  
FSV-841A  
Satellite  
Compass  
SC-50/110  
100/110/115/  
220/230 VAC,  
1φ, 50/60 Hz  
Note 1: Power Kit (option, installed in  
processor unit) required to connect CS-120A.  
Standard type configuration  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.1 Control Description  
Note that the [AUDIO] control is not operative from the 2nd control unit when two  
control units are installed.  
Automatic transducer train width  
on audio bearing mark (horizontal  
mode), vertical bearing mark  
Adjusts volume of internal  
(vertical mode).  
and external (option) loudspeaker.  
Off12°→ 24°→ 36°→Off  
Adjusts display brilliance  
(supplied monitor only).  
In vertical combination mode  
switches between normal  
and expansion display.  
Raise, lower the transducer.  
: Raises the transducer.  
: Lowers the transducer  
(mid protrusion).  
Adjusts receiver  
sensitivity (hori-  
zontal and ver-  
tical modes).  
Displays range  
: Lowers the transducer  
(full protrusion).  
and audio bearing marks  
to monitor echoes along  
audio bearing mark  
(horizontal mode).  
Selects display  
range (horizontal  
and vertical modes).  
Turns power off.  
Turns power on.  
Selects display  
mode.  
FSV-84  
V1/S  
HSV  
Deletes  
Selects user  
program.  
Trackball  
• Positions trackball  
mark.  
• Selects items,  
options on menu.  
Sets transducer  
tilt angle  
(horizontal  
mode).  
trackball-  
selected  
mark.  
Opens, closes menu.  
Execute assigned  
program.  
Selects mode (horizontal 1/  
horizontal 2, or horizontal/  
vertical, horizontal/half-circle)  
for which to adjust sensitivity,  
select range.  
Off centers the picture.  
SHOOT:  
Displays net data.  
EVENT:  
Inscribes event mark,  
own ship position mark.  
ESTIMATE 1, 2: Compares volume of  
two fish schools.  
TARGET LOCK: Tracks fish school.  
FISH:  
Measures speed of  
fish school.  
Control unit  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.2  
Turning the Power On/Off  
1.2.1  
Turning the power on  
Press the POWER ON (|) switch. A beep sounds, the lamp above the switch  
lights, and the last-used mode is presented.  
1.2.2  
Turning the power off  
1. First retract the transducer with the [ ] key. The lamp above the switch blinks  
while the transducer is being raised and lights steadily when it is fully raised.  
Note: While raising the transducer, the ship speed must be no more than 15  
kts to prevent damage to the transducer and hull unit.  
2. Press the POWER OFF ( ) switch for more than one second, after the [ ]  
key lights steadily.  
Note: The transducer is automatically retracted into the tank if the POWER  
OFF ( ) switch is pressed before retracting the transducer. However,  
for safety purposes, make it a habit to retract the transducer before  
turning off the power.  
POWER  
TRANSDUCER  
POWER OFF  
switch  
Full protrusion key  
Mid protrusion key  
Retraction key  
POWER ON switch  
POWER & TRANSDUCER controls  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.3 Lowering, Raising the Transducer  
CAUTION  
Maximum speed while the transducer is  
projected and being raised or lowered  
is as below, to prevent damage to the  
transducer.  
Projected Raising/  
Lowering  
800 mm stroke Max. 18 kt Max. 15 kt  
1100 mm stroke Max. 18 kt Max. 15 kt  
1.3.1  
Lowering the transducer  
With the boat at the fishing ground, press the [ ] or [ ] key. The lamp above the  
key pressed blinks during lowering and lights when the transducer is completely  
lowered to selected protrusion distance. It takes about 21 seconds for full  
protrusion in case of 800 mm stroke and 28 seconds in case of 1100 mm stroke.  
In normal use fully lower the transducer. If the transducer becomes entangled in  
the net for some reason, partially raise the transducer with the [ ] key. This  
raises the transducer by 400 mm.  
1.3.2  
Raising the transducer  
Press the [ ] key to raise the transducer. The lamp above the switch blinks while  
the transducer is being raised and lights steadily when it is fully raised.  
1.4 Screen Brilliance  
The [BRILLIANCE] control adjusts screen brilliance. Adjust it to suit lighting  
conditions.  
Note: The brilliance of an external monitor cannot be adjusted with the  
[BRILLIANCE] control. Use the associated control on the monitor.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.5  
Control Panel Dimmer  
The dimmer for the control panel may be adjusted on the DISPLAY SETTING  
menu as below.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
TX PULSE LENGTH-H : 9  
TX POWER-H  
TVG-NEAR-H  
TVG-MEDIUM-H  
TVG-FAR-H  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AGC-H  
: 0  
2ND AGC-H  
ECHO AVERAGE-H  
COLOR-H  
: 0  
: 0  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE-H : COLOR CURVE 3  
H-SCAN SETTING...  
V-SCAN SETTING...  
OTHERS...  
Main menu (default)  
2. Use the trackball to select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
ES1 SETTING...  
ES2 SETTING...  
ERASE MARKS...  
DISPLAY SETTING...  
ALARM & AUDIO...  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD...  
INITIAL SETTING...  
OTHERS menu  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
3. Use the trackball to select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
DISPLAY SETTING  
DISPLAY MODE...  
MODE SELECTION  
TX/RX MODE  
: MODE KEY  
: ALTERNATIVE  
: LANDSCAPE  
H2/S DISPLAY  
PRESENTATION MODE : HEAD UP  
TM DISPLAY RANGE  
BEARING REF  
TILT LEVER  
: 1.6R  
: SHIP HEADING  
: TILT  
S AUTO OFF CENTER : OFF  
H-SLICE WIDTH  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC  
NET COURSE MARK  
MANUAL DEGAUSS  
AUTO DEGAUSS  
DIMMER  
: 16  
: KP SYNC  
: ENTER  
: EXECUTE  
: INT SENSOR  
: 10  
KEY BEEP VOLUME  
: 5  
DISPLAY SETTING menu  
4. Select DIMMER with the trackball and press the [MENU] key to open the  
dialog box.  
DIALOG BOX FOR SETTING NUMERIC DATA  
Select (raise setting) or (lower setting) with  
the trackball and press [MENU] key to change  
setting. Select QUIT to finish; CANCEL to cancel  
operation.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
Dialog box for setting numeric value  
5. Select S (raise setting) or T (lower setting) with the trackball.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to change the setting.  
7. Select QUIT with the trackball and press the [MENU] key.  
8. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.6 Display Mode, Display Division  
This sonar provides a total of ten display mode selections: Horizontal,  
Horizontal2, S, S combination, Vertical1, Vertical1, Vertical2, Vertical1 + ES1  
(echo sounder), Vertical 1 + ES2 (net recorder), History, ES1, ES2, and ES1 +  
ES2. The user may preset as many modes as desired and select one with the  
[MODE] key.  
1.6.1  
Selecting a display mode  
Press the [MODE] key several times until the desired display appears. The  
default modes are Horizontal, Horizontal1 + Horizontal2, Vertical1, Vertical 1 +  
Vertical 2, and History. You can program the [MODE] key to show any or all of  
the modes mentioned above. For further details, see DISPLAY MODE on page  
9-2.  
Note that the [MODE] key may be programmed to show a pull-down menu  
instead. For further details, see MODE SELECTION on page 9-2. In this case  
the procedure for mode selection is as follows:  
1. Press the [MODE] key. The following pull-down menu appears.  
H1  
S
H1  
H1&H2  
V1  
H1&H2  
H$S  
V1&V2  
HISTORY  
V1  
V1&V2  
V1&ES1  
V1&ES2  
HISTORY  
ES1  
Default setting  
ES2  
ES1&ES2  
All modes enabled  
Mode selection menus  
2. Use the trackball to select display mode desired.  
3. Press the [MENU] key to display the selected mode.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.6.2  
Sample display mode pictures  
Below are typical pictures. For sake of brevity, indications and marks are not  
shown. For meaning of marks and indications, see respective indications and  
marks description illustration in applicable chapter.  
Horizontal mode  
This mode provides 360-degree coverage around the vessel and it is useful for  
general search. For further details, see Chapter 2.  
N
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
W
E
DATA  
DISPLAY  
S
Horizontal mode display  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
H2 mode  
This mode provides two horizontal screens in one of the configurations shown  
below. The default configuration, LANDSCAPE, shows two horizontal displays  
up and down. Other configurations available are as shown below. Desired  
configuration may be chosen with H2 DISPLAY in the DISPLAY SETTING menu.  
For further details, see Chapter 2.  
N
N
N
1
1
85  
85  
1
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
1
2
W
E
N
1
3
1
3
2
2
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
3
1
2
2000  
2000  
2
3
1
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
S
S
W
E
PORTRAIT  
LANDSCAPE  
N
N
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
W
E
N
W
E
N
1
2
3
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
1
1
85  
85  
00  
E
30
W
W
E
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
3
3
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2000  
2000  
3
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
S
S
S
S
LEFT INSET  
RIGHT INSET  
Horizontal 2 display  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
Slant mode, single display  
The Slant mode shows a 180-degree cross section, using chosen tilt angle and  
train setting.  
Bottom  
Fish school  
Sea surface reflection  
Slant display (single)  
Slant mode, combination display  
N
N
N-UP  
HEADING  
321˚  
HEADING  
321˚  
N-UP  
902m  
678m  
346m  
278˚  
9.83NM  
5:32  
902m  
678m  
346m  
278˚  
9.83NM  
5:32  
H
R2000m  
HR2000m  
S R 1000m  
T 24˚  
SHIP COURSE 335˚  
SHIP SPEED 12.5kt  
SHIP COURSE 335˚  
SHIP SPEED 12.5kt  
AUTO  
AUTO  
T 17˚  
(21˚)  
G 10.0  
T 17˚  
(21˚)  
G 10.0  
B
B
LAT/LON[DGPS] (000.000)  
32˚52.150N  
LAT/LON[DGPS] (000.000)  
32˚52.150N  
RO 357˚  
W
12m/s  
W
12m/s  
P
8
P
8
G
P
4.0  
6
132˚12.150E  
132˚12.150E  
DEPTH  
321m  
DEPTH  
321m  
WATER CURR  
WATER CURR  
C1  
C2  
C3  
1.2kt 342˚  
0.8kt 298˚  
0.4kt 256˚  
C1  
C2  
C3  
1.2kt 342˚  
0.8kt 298˚  
0.4kt 256˚  
1
1
NET DEPTH  
NET DEPTH  
85  
S1  
S2  
S3  
134m  
178m  
213m  
S1  
S2  
S3  
134m  
178m  
213m  
85  
1
1
2
1
1
N
FISH HISTOGRAM  
Scan1  
FISH HISTOGRAM  
Scan1  
S
R1000m  
T 24˚  
2
1
1
2
3
3
1
3
RO 357˚  
2
G
P
7.5  
6
3
2
1
2
1
1000  
500  
2
3
1
3
WATER TEMP  
10.3˚C  
WATER TEMP  
10.3˚C  
1
1
2
3
20min  
10  
0
20min  
10  
0
3
12  
10  
12  
10  
1475m  
156m  
(164m)  
128˚  
2975m  
153m  
12.3kt  
256˚  
1475m  
156m  
(164m)  
128˚  
1
975m  
153m  
12.3kt  
256˚  
2
3
32˚52.150N  
132˚12.150E  
S
C
32˚52.150N  
S
C
R
B
1056m  
234˚  
R
B
1056m  
234˚  
8
8
1
132˚12.150E  
B
B
2
S
Landscape display (Slant mode on bottom half)  
Portrait display (Slant mode at right half)  
N
HEADING  
321˚  
N-UP  
902m  
678m  
346m  
278˚  
9.83NM  
5:32  
H R 600m  
T 12˚  
SHIP COURSE 335˚  
SHIP SPEED 12.5kt  
B
LAT/LON[DGPS] (000.000)  
32˚52.150N  
G
P
5.5  
3
W
12m/s  
132˚12.150E  
DEPTH  
321m  
WATER CURR  
C1  
C2  
C3  
1.2kt 342˚  
0.8kt 298˚  
0.4kt 256˚  
NET DEPTH  
1475m  
156m  
(164m)  
128˚  
S1  
S2  
S3  
134m  
178m  
213m  
32˚52.150N  
132˚12.150E  
B
W
E
N
S R 2000m  
FISH HISTOGRAM  
AUTO  
T 17˚  
1
Scan1  
(21˚)  
RO347˚  
G 10.0  
P
8
W
1
00  
85  
1
2
3
WATER TEMP  
10.3˚C  
10  
1
E
20min  
12  
0
2
3
2
1
10002  
1
3
3
1975m  
153m  
12.3kt  
256˚  
10  
8
1
2
2
3
3
S
C
R
B
1056m  
234˚  
1
2
3
S
S
Slant mode in inset  
Slant display (combination)  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
V1 and V2 modes  
The V1 and V2 modes show a vertical slice of the bearing selected by the  
vertical bearing mark on the horizontal display. The vertical 2 mode provides two  
vertical slices. Chapter 3 discusses the vertical mode.  
N
N
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
W
E
W
E
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
500  
1000  
50
0  
1000  
1500  
1000  
1500  
500  
500  
00  
1000  
1000  
V
52°  
S
Vertical 2 Display  
Vertical 1 Display  
Vertical 1 Display  
V1 & V2 mode  
V1 mode  
V1 and V2 displays  
V1 + ES1 (or ES2) mode  
The V1 + ES1 (or ES2) combines the vertical 1 display with the picture from an  
echo sounder or a net recorder.  
N
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
W
E
DATA  
DISPLAY  
500  
1000  
1500  
0
500  
30  
60  
1000  
Echosounder  
Display  
Vertical 1 Display  
(ES 1 or ES 2)  
V1 & ES1 (ES2) display  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
History mode  
The history mode shows the horizontal and history displays. Echo data for the  
echoes within the history marker on the horizontal display scroll down the history  
display in the downward direction – the latest echoes at the top and the oldest at  
the bottom. This mode is useful for observing fish echoes over time. For further  
details, see Chapter 6.  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
S
History Display  
Horizontal Display  
History display  
ES1 mode  
The ES1 mode shows the echo sounder display. For further details, see Chapter  
5.  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
S
Echo Sounder  
Display (ES1)  
Horizontal Display  
ES1 display  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
ES2 mode  
The ES2 mode shows the net recorder display. The net recorder display can  
show the downward looking picture alone or both the downward and upward  
looking pictures. Note that this mode can also show the echo sounder picture.  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
Net Recorder  
Display (ES2)  
S
Horizontal Display  
ES2 display (shown: downward picture)  
ES1 + ES2 mode  
The ES1 + ES2 mode shows the echo sounder and net recorder displays.  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
0
30  
Echo Sounder  
Display (ES1)  
60  
0
Net Recorder  
Display (ES2)  
10  
20  
S
Horizontal Display  
ES1 + ES2 display  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.7  
Adjusting the Gain  
The [GAIN] control adjusts receiver gain (sensitivity) for the horizontal, slant  
vertical modes. Adjust it so fish echoes are clearly displayed with minimal noise  
on the screen. Too high a gain setting not only displays excess noise and makes  
it difficult to discriminate wanted echoes but also causes bottom echoes to be  
painted in strong colors, resulting in echoes being masked by bottom reflections.  
Normally, set the control somewhere between positions 3 and 7.  
1. If the horizontal and vertical modes are active, press the [HSV] key to show  
the range and gain indications of the mode you wish to adjust in yellow.  
Pressing the [HSV] key changes the range and gain indication in yellow  
between horizontal1 and horizontal2, or horizontal and vertical, alternately.  
2. Adjust the [GAIN] control.  
New gain setting is momentarily displayed in large characters at the top of  
each display. Gain is always displayed at the top right-hand corner of the  
horizontal display and bottom on the vertical 1 display.  
Gain too low  
Gain too high  
Gain proper  
Example of proper and improper gain settings on the horizontal display  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
1.8  
Menu Overview  
Most operations are carried out through the menu. This section provides basic  
menu operating information.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
Select QUIT with trackball  
and then press [MENU] key  
to close menu.  
TX PULSE LENGTH-H : 9  
TX POWER-H  
TVG-NEAR-H  
TVG-MEDIUM-H  
TVG-FAR-H  
: 9  
USER MENU  
This menu may be  
programmed as  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
desired (max. 10  
items). Shown here  
are the items of the  
default user menu.  
AGC-H  
: 0  
2ND AGC-H  
ECHO AVERAGE-H  
COLOR-H  
: 0  
: 0  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE-H : COLOR CURVE 3  
H-SCAN SETTING...  
V-SCAN SETTING...  
OTHERS...  
Select menu with trackball,  
and then press [MENU] key  
to display. (Ellipsis mark  
(...) indicates a menu.)  
Main menu  
Note: The menus illustrations in this manual show current menu settings with a  
gray highlight. Actual equipment shows current settings differently.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
2. Select menu desired with the trackball and press the [MENU] key. (For  
example, select the H-SCAN SETTING menu.)  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
Choose QUIT to close  
all menus.  
MENU TITLE  
H-SCAN SETTING  
Select QUIT with trackball  
and press the [MENU]  
key to close menu  
currently open.  
TX INTERVAL  
: 9  
: 9  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 2  
: 0  
Pointer shows current  
selection.  
TX PULSE LENGTH  
TX POWER  
TVG-NEAR  
TVG-MEDIUM  
TVG-FAR  
NOISE LIMITER  
REVERBERATION  
Menu items and  
current settings  
SIDE LOBE SUPPRESS : 1  
AGC  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
2ND AGC  
NEAR AGC  
ECHO AVERAGE  
INT REJECT  
: 0  
: 0  
BOTTOM SUPPRESS  
: 0  
FREQ SHIFT  
: 0  
FREQ/BEARING SET  
OTHERS...  
: 180  
H-SCAN SETTING menu  
Note: In the S-mode combination display, the [HSV] key functions to switch  
between H-SCAN SETTING menu and S-SCAN SETTING menu.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
3. Select menu item desired with the trackball and press the [MENU] key. (For  
example, select NOISE LIMITER.) A dialog box for the corresponding menu  
item appears.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
H-SCAN SETTING  
TX INTERVAL  
: 9  
: 9  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 2  
: 0  
TX PULSE LENGTH  
TX POWER  
TVG-NEAR  
TVG-MEDIUM  
TVG-FAR  
How to set numeric data  
1. Select or as desired.  
2. Press the [MENU] key to  
change setting.  
3. Select QUIT and press  
the [MENU] key to finish.  
QUIT  
NOISE LIMITER  
REVERBERATION  
CANCEL  
SIDE LOBE SUPPRESS : 1  
AGC  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
2ND AGC  
NEAR AGC  
ECHO AVERAGE  
INT REJECT  
: 0  
: 0  
BOTTOM SUPPRESS  
: 0  
FREQ SHIFT  
: 0  
FREQ/BEARING SET  
OTHERS...  
: 180  
H-SCAN SETTING menu  
4. Select S (raise setting) or T (lower setting) with the trackball and press the  
[MENU] key to change setting.  
Note: For items having options the arrows in the dialog box are replaced  
with appropriate options. For example the dialog box for selection of  
picture advance speed in the echo sounder mode looks as below.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
1/1  
1/2  
1/4  
1/8  
SPEED SYNC  
Echo sounder picture advance speed dialog box  
5. Use the trackball to select QUIT from the dialog box and press the [MENU]  
key to close the menu.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
Note: In the default setting, the sub menu item INITIAL SETTING in the  
OTHERS menu and some items in the INITIALIZATION menu are shown in red.  
This means their items are locked to prevent accidental change of setting. When  
you open one of these sub menus and select an item, the message below  
appears. To change the setting of the selected item, select YES and press the  
[MENU] key, and the dialog box for the item selected appears. To escape, select  
NO and press the [MENU] key. You may wish not to show the message below,  
that is, disable the setting protection feature. For further details, see ITEM  
ATTRIBUTION on page 9-16.  
CAUTION  
YES  
THIS ITEM IS DEFINED AS NON-CHANGEABLE ITEM.  
ARE YOUSURE TO CHANGE IT TO CHANGEABLE?  
NO  
Caution for menu setting change  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW  
This page intentionally left blank.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.1  
Basic Operating Procedure  
4. Select horizontal display.  
2. Lower transducer.  
: Mid protrusion  
: Full protrusion  
3. Adjust display brilliance.  
1. Turn on power.  
FSV-84  
V1/S  
HSV  
6. Select range.  
8. Set tilt angle.  
7. Adjust gain.  
5. Press to choose the screen (horizontal or  
vertical, or horizontal1 or horizontal2) to  
adjust gain and range.  
Control unit  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.2  
Indications and Marks  
2.2.1  
Horizontal mode  
The horizontal mode provides a 360° picture around the boat. To display the  
horizontal mode picture, press the [MODE] key.  
Fish track  
Net shoot data  
Distance run from shooting  
Time from shooting  
Target lock mark  
Presentation mode  
Fish movement vector  
Trackball data  
Scan data  
Range  
Current auto tilt  
Gain  
N
Slant range  
Horizontal range  
Depth  
Relative bearing  
or True bearing*  
N-UP H  
148m  
142m  
45m  
0.51NM  
5:32  
R
400m  
°
°
AUTO  
T 17  
(21 )  
°
115  
B
G 10  
User program no.  
W
12m/s  
P
8
Fish mark  
Latest fish mark  
Line connecting  
Wind speed, direction*  
Latest event mark  
Auto train mark  
A
fish marks  
Fish estimate mark  
Fish estimate mark no.  
Fish estimate mark data  
Trackball mark  
Audio bearing mark  
1
Heading mark  
North mark*  
Own ship mark  
W
E
1
3
85  
2
Current (tide)  
mark*  
3
1
2
3
Range ring  
Bearing scale  
Event mark  
2
1
1
Own ship position mark  
Ship's track*  
2
150  
2
3
1
1
2
3
Event mark data  
158m  
48m  
(210m)  
1
230m  
70m  
2
3
Horizontal range  
Present depth  
Depth at measured  
Relative bearing  
or True bearing*  
* Requires appropriate  
sensor.  
S 12.3kt  
R 146m  
34°56.789N  
123°45.678E  
°
°
262  
°
290  
B
330  
C
B
S
Target lock/fish movement data  
Horizontal range  
Depth  
Speed  
Course  
Range ring  
data  
Net shoot  
mark  
Range  
mark  
Net  
sonde mark*  
Range mark and  
audio bearing  
mark data  
Trackball mark  
position  
Horizontal mode indications and marks  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.2.2  
Horizontal2 mode  
The H2 mode shows one of four kinds of horizontal display combinations:  
LANDSCAPE, PORTRAIT, RIGHT INSET and LEFT INSET. Follow the  
procedure below to select a combination display.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
TX PULSELENGTH-H : 9  
TX POWER-H  
TVG-NEAR-H  
TVG-MEDIUM-H  
TVG-FAR-H  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AGC-H  
: 0  
2ND AGC-H  
ECHO AVERAGE-H  
COLOR-H  
: 0  
: 0  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE-H : COLOR CURVE 3  
H-SCAN SETTING...  
V-SCAN SETTING...  
OTHERS...  
Main Menu  
2. Select OTHERS with the trackball and press the [MENU] key to open the  
OTHERS menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
ES1 SETTING...  
ES2 SETTING...  
ERASE MARKS...  
DISPLAY SETTING...  
ALARM & AUDIO...  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD...  
INITIAL SETTING...  
OTHERS menu  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key to open the DISPLAY  
SETTING menu.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
DISPLAY SETTING  
DISPLAY MODE...  
MODE SELECTION  
TX/RX MODE  
: MODE KEY  
: ALTERNATIVE  
: LANDSCAPE  
H2/S DISPLAY  
PRESENTATION MODE : HEAD UP  
TM DISPLAY RANGE  
BEARING REF  
TILT LEVER  
: 1.6R  
: SHIP HEADING  
: TILT  
S AUTO OFF CENTER : OFF  
H-SLICE WIDTH  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC  
NET COURSE MARK  
MANUAL DEGAUSS  
AUTO DEGAUSS  
DIMMER  
: 16  
: KP SYNC  
: ENTER  
: EXECUTE  
: INT SENSOR  
: 10  
KEY BEEP VOLUME  
: 5  
DISPLAY SETTING menu  
4. Select H2/S DISPLAY and press the [MENU] key.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
LANDSCAPE  
PORTRAIT  
RIGHT INSET  
LEFT INSET  
Dialog box for setting combination  
5. Select the desired combination with the trackball and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key to finish.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
N
N-UP  
3902m  
3678m  
1346m  
278˚  
9.83NM  
5:32  
H1  
R
4000m  
AUTO  
T 17˚  
(21˚)  
G 10.0  
B
W
12m/s  
P
8
H1 display  
1
85  
1
1
2
N
H2  
R
1000m  
T 24˚  
The range, tilt, gain and user  
program are set independently,  
for each display.  
G
P
7.5  
6
1
H2 display  
2975m  
156m  
(164m)  
128˚  
2975m  
153m  
12.3kt  
256˚  
32˚52.150N  
132˚12.150E  
S
C
R
B
1056m  
234˚  
1
2
B
LANDSCAPE  
N
N
1
85  
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
1
3
1
2
2
3
DISPLAY  
3
1
2
3
2
1
3
1
2
2000  
2000  
2
3
1
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
S
S
PORTRAIT  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
N
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
W
E
N
DISPLAY  
1
85  
0  
W
E
1
3
2
3
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
2000  
3
1
3
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
3
S
S
LEFT INSET  
N
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
W
E
N
1
2
DISPLAY  
3
1
85  
30
W
E
1
3
2
3
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
2000  
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
S
S
RIGHT INSET  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.3  
Display Range  
The [RANGE] control selects the detection range. The range selected is  
momentarily displayed in large characters at the top of the screen. Range is  
always displayed at the top right hand corner of the screen.  
SEA SURFACE  
on the screen.  
Range indicated  
BOTTOM  
Range concept  
Below are the default ranges (in meters).  
Range Setting  
Range  
1
2
3
4
5
6
100  
200  
400  
600  
800  
1000  
1. If the two horizontal displays, slant display or the horizontal and vertical  
displays are active, press the [HSV] key to show the range and gain  
indications of the horizontal mode in yellow. (This step is not necessary when  
only the horizontal mode is active.) Range and gain indications are shown in  
white on other modes  
2. Operate the [RANGE] control to select desired range.  
Note: Ranges may be preset as desired on the PRESET, MEMORY CARD  
menu. For further details, see H/S-SCAN RANGE on page 9-5.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.4  
Tilt Angle  
The tilt angle shows the direction to which the sound wave is emitted. When the  
sound wave is emitted horizontally, the tilt angle is said to be 0° and when  
vertically, 90°. The tilt angle can be set between –5°(upward) to 90° (downward),  
in increments of 1°. The tilt angles for horizontal 1 and horizontal 2 modes can  
be set independently of one another.  
2.4.1  
Setting the tilt angle  
To manually set a tilt angle, operate the [TILT] control. Watch the tilt angle  
indication and tilt angle indicator at the top right corner of the screen.  
Select tilt angle depending on target fish. For surface fish select a shallow angle  
(about 5°) and for bottom fish, a deep angle.  
-5-degree  
0-degree horizontal direction (tilt angle 0-degree)  
Transducer  
Tilt angle setting range  
+90-degree  
Note: The [TILT] control functions as a bearing setting lever in the following  
conditions:  
TILT LEVER in the DISPLAY SETTING menu is set to “TILT & V1.”  
The vertical display is chosen in the vertical mode.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.4.2  
Automatic tilt  
The [AUTO TILT] key automatically scans the tilt angle within the selected width.  
This is useful when you want to find the center depth of a fish school.  
1. Press the [AUTO TILT] key to select auto tilt angle desired. Each time the  
[AUTO TILT] key is pressed the auto tilt angle changes in the following  
sequence.  
OFF →  
[
1 - 4°  
]
[
2 - 6°  
]
[
3 - 8°  
]
(Narrow)  
(Wide)  
OFF →  
[
2 - 10°  
]
[
4 - 16°  
]
[
6 - 20°  
]
Automatic tilt range (narrow) with AUTO TILT key  
Range  
Width (1)  
Width (2)  
Width (3)  
Period  
60, 100  
150, 200  
300, 400  
500, 600  
700, 800  
900, 1000  
1100 and more  
4°∗  
2°  
1°  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
6°∗  
4°∗  
2°  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
8°∗  
6°∗  
4°∗  
3°  
As above  
As above  
As above  
Period: One trans.  
Tilt angle changes  
in 2° increments for  
asterisk-marked  
width;  
1° increments for  
all other widths.  
Automatic tilt range (wide) with AUTO TILT key  
Range  
Width (1)  
Width (2)  
Width (3)  
Period  
60, 100  
150, 200  
300, 400  
500, 600  
700, 800  
900, 1000  
1100 and more  
10°  
As above  
As above  
8°  
6°  
4°  
2°  
16°  
20°∗  
As above  
As above  
As above  
16°  
12°  
6°  
Period: One trans.  
Period: Four trans.  
Period: Two trans.  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Same as above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
12°  
8°  
4°  
* For combination modes H1/H2, H1/V, H1/S, two transmissions/period at  
depth between 60 and 200 m and one transmission/period for range 300 m  
or greater.  
Note: Wide tilt angle is activated from the SYSTEM menu. For further details,  
contact your dealer.  
2. Auto tilt begins, with the tilt angle set with the [TILT] control as the center tilt  
angle.  
3. If necessary, change center tilt angle with the [TILT] control.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
For example, when the [RANGE] control, [TILT] control and [AUTO TILT] key are  
set to 800 m, 8° and width (1) respectively, the tilt angle changes at each  
transmission as follows:  
8°9°8°7°8°  
Tilt angle setting  
Auto tilt concept  
Note: The [AUTO TILT] key is inoperative when the target lock function is active  
or is made active. Auto tilt is resumed once target lock is disabled.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.4.3  
Relation between bottom echo and tilt angle  
The figure at the top of the next page illustrates how two fish schools “a” and “b”  
are displayed on the screen using three different tilt angles.  
Case 1: Tilt angle 30° to 40°  
This tilt angle will display the entire bottom since it is captured by the full width of  
the beam. Fish school is obscured by the bottom.  
Case 2: Tilt angle 10° to 20°  
This tilt angle will only display half the bottom since it is captured by only the  
lower half of the beam. Fish school is located above the bottom.  
Case 3: Tilt angle 0° to 5°  
This tilt angle may or may not capture the bottom since the returning echo is  
weak. Fish school is located close to the bottom.  
Case 1  
Case 3  
Case 2  
Fish school "a"  
Fish school "a"  
Bottom  
Fish school "a"  
Fish school "b"  
Bottom  
Bottom  
Case 1  
Case 3  
Case 2  
Fish echo and tilt angle  
Points to consider  
Normally, a vertically distributed fish school is a better sonar target than the  
bottom, because it reflects the transmitted pulse back toward the transducer.  
In case 3, both fish schools “a” and “b” are presented. Generally speaking,  
however, midwater fish schools tend to be larger than bottom fish schools  
and they are often displayed near the bottom on the display.  
It is difficult to detect bottom fish when they are not distributed vertically.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.4.4  
Tilt angle for surface fish  
Sound emitted from the sonar transducer forms an oval-shaped beam with a  
width of approximately 18° in the vertical direction (vertical beam width at -6dB).  
The tilt angle is indicated by the angle between the centerline of the beam and  
the horizontal plane. Then, if the tilt angle is set to 0°, the centerline is parallel  
with the sea surface and one half of the emitted sound goes upward, toward the  
sea surface.  
This causes one half of the emitted sound to be reflected toward the transducer  
and displayed on the screen as sea surface reflections. When the sea is calm,  
since the sound is reflected just like a light hitting a mirror at a low incident angle,  
it propagates away and the sea surface reflections become negligible.  
However if the sea is not calm enough, they will become dominant and interfere  
with observation of wanted echoes. To minimize these sea surface reflections  
and to search surface fish schools effectively, the tilt angle is usually set  
between 8° and 9° so the upper portion of the beam becomes almost parallel  
with the sea surface. When the sea is rough, the tilt angle is slightly increased to  
lessen the affect of sea surface reflections.  
Sea surface  
Tilt angle 0°  
18°  
Sea surface  
Tilt angle 8-9°  
18°  
Tilt angle  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.4.5  
Suitable tilt angle  
The figure below illustrates the relationship among tilt angle, depth and detection  
range. Refer to it to find out the suitable tilt angle for a given depth/detection  
range.  
Tilt angle and beam coverage (vertical beamwidth 18° at -6dB  
)
Range(m)  
400  
100  
200  
300  
(800)  
(200)  
(400)  
(600)  
20(40)  
Tilt 0  
(0˚-9˚)  
˚
40(80)  
60(120)  
Tilt 5  
˚
(0˚-14˚)  
80(160)  
100(200)  
Tilt 15  
˚
(6˚-24˚)  
Grey: Tilt 10  
˚
(1˚-19˚)  
200(400)  
(-6dB)  
300 m  
Vertical width of sonar beam  
200 m  
100 m  
31 m  
93 m  
18°  
62 m  
Tilt angle and beam coverage  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.5 Measuring Range and Bearing to a Target  
Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the target you want to  
measure the range and bearing. The range, bearing and depth to the target  
appear at the upper left corner of the screen.  
Trackball position may also be show in latitude and longitude. For further details,  
see CURSOR POSITION on page 9-11.  
B
TRACKBALL DATA  
Trackball mark  
Slant range  
Horizontal range  
Depth  
Heading line  
B Relative or  
True bearing*  
Own ship mark  
* Four display formats  
available. See OTHER  
MARKS on page 9-11.  
34 56.789N  
°
°
Trackball mark  
L/L position  
123 45.678E  
Location of trackball data  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.6  
Eliminating Weak Echoes  
Echoes from targets such as bottom and fish return to the transducer in order of  
distance to them, and when we compare their intensities at the transducer face,  
those from nearer targets are generally stronger when their reflecting properties  
are nearly equal. The sonar operator will be quite inconvenienced if these  
echoes are directly displayed on the screen, since he cannot judge the actual  
size of the target from the size of echoes displayed on the screen. To overcome  
this inconvenience, use the TVG function. It compensates for propagation loss of  
sound in water; amplification of echoes on short range is suppressed and  
gradually increased as range increases so that similar targets are displayed in  
the similar intensities irrespective of the ranges to them.  
The FSV-84 has three TVG functions, NEAR, MEDIUM and FAR, and they  
mainly compensate for propagation loss on short, middle and long ranges  
respectively, centered at the ranges shown below. The higher the TVG setting  
the greater the amplification of echoes.  
Note: TVG distances can  
be adjusted from the  
menu.  
See page 2-48.  
Principle of TVG  
The TVG is also used to suppress unwanted echoes and noise which appear in  
a certain range area on the screen such as sea surface reflections and cruising  
noise. To set TVG properly, do the following:  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select H-SCAN SETTING with the trackball and press the [MENU] key to  
open the H-SCAN SETTING menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
H-SCAN SETTING  
TX INTERVAL  
: 9  
: 9  
TX PULSE LENGTH  
TX POWER  
TVG-NEAR  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 2  
TVG-MEDIUM  
TVG-FAR  
NOISE LIMITER  
REVERBERATION  
: 0  
SIDELOBE SUPPRESS : 1  
AGC  
: 0  
: 0  
2ND AGC  
NEAR AGC  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
ECHO AVERAGE  
INT REJECT  
BOTTOM SUPPRESS  
FREQ SHIFT  
: 0  
FREQ/BEARING SET  
OTHERS...  
: 180  
H-SCAN SETTING menu  
3. Select TVG-NEAR with the trackball and press the [MENU] key to show the  
dialog box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
Numeric data entry dialog box  
4. Use the trackball to select S or T and press the [MENU] key to set. The  
setting range is –5 to 5. The higher the setting the greater the TVG effect.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to set TVG-MEDIUM and TVG-FAR.  
When sea surface reflections or plankton layers disturb the picture, decrease  
appropriate TVG option by one or two steps.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
Note: When a fish school is located on a long-range setting (about 800 meters)  
and is approaching own ship do as follows:  
Adjust the tilt to keep the fish school in the center of the sonar beam, namely,  
fish school is displayed in strongest colors possible. Confirm that the fish echo  
is displayed in the same color as it approaches. If the color suddenly changes  
to weaker colors as the fish enters MEDIUM and NEAR areas, the TVG is  
improperly set. Adjust the TVG. If this again produces sea surface reflections  
and noise try to remove them with the AGC and noise limiter.  
If the above procedure does not produce satisfactory results, the TVG curve  
can be changed on the OTHERS sub menu in the H-SCAN SETTING menu.  
Also, adjust the setting of NEAR AGC, referring to next section.  
2.7  
Suppressing Bottom Tail  
2.7.1  
Adjust AGC  
The AGC functions to automatically reduce the receiver gain only against strong  
echoes such as the bottom or a large fish school. Since weak echoes remain  
unaffected, a small fish school becomes easier to detect. Adjust it so that the  
AGC works only on bottom reflections. Do not set it too high; weak echoes may  
be missed.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.7.2  
Decrease pulse length  
The pulse length determines the length of the transmission pulse emitted into the  
water. While a longer pulse is advantageous for long-range sounding, it has the  
disadvantage of being poor in discrimination of targets, that is, the ability to  
separate several closely located targets. When searching bottom fish, therefore,  
it is useful to shorten the pulse length in order to separate fish echoes from  
bottom reflections. Decrease the pulse length setting to shorten the pulse length.  
For search of surface and midwater fish in which bottom reflections are not so  
strong, use the longest pulse length “9”.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select TX PULSE LENGTH and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the longer the pulse length.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2.7.3  
Adjust 2nd AGC  
While it is ideal to suppress bottom echoes with the AGC alone there are some  
fishing grounds where this is not possible. (The high power sonar has the  
advantage of long-range detection but this can also be a disadvantage, since  
weaker echoes may be hidden in strong, unwanted echoes such as the bottom.)  
If you cannot suppress bottom echoes or sea surface reflections by the AGC  
function alone, use the 2nd AGC feature. Normally a setting of 1 or 2 is suitable.  
For especially strong echoes, use a setting of 3 or 4.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select 2nd AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-12. The higher the setting the greater the suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.7.4  
Adjust Near AGC  
When an excessively strong echo is received in shallow or heavily sedimented  
waters, you may not be able to suppress it by the TVG control alone. In this case,  
a fish school which is displayed at more than 300 m away may disappear  
gradually when the ship is approaching the fish school.  
Use the Near TVG feature to suppress this strong echo. Normally set it between  
3 and 4, however, this setting depends on the sea area. Do not set it too high; all  
echoes (including noise) from near distance may be painted in red.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select NEAR AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-10. The higher the setting the greater the echo level of  
near distance.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.8  
Suppressing Bottom and Sea Surface  
Reflections in Shallow Waters  
In shallow fishing grounds with hard or rocky bottom, bottom reflections often  
interfere with wanted fish echoes and they can not be eliminated sufficiently with  
the aforementioned TVG and AGC functions, especially when the TILT is set to a  
larger angle in order to track fish schools approaching within 400 m. In such  
cases try to reduce the output power by adjusting the Tx output instead of  
turning down the gain. The picture becomes clearer when output power is  
reduced rather than when the GAIN is decreased as illustrated below.  
INCORRECT  
METHOD  
Fish echo  
Fish echo  
weakened  
TVG and AGC  
adjusted with  
TX POWER kept high  
CORRECT  
METHOD  
Fish echo  
Reduce TX POWER  
with GAIN kept  
constant  
How to suppress bottom and sea surface reflections in shallow waters  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select TX POWER and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the higher the Tx power.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.9  
Rejecting Sonar Interference and Noise  
While observing the sonar picture, you may encounter occasional or intermittent  
noise and interference. These are mostly caused by on-board electronic  
equipment, engine or propeller noise, or electrical noise from other sonars being  
operated nearby.  
2.9.1  
Identifying noise source  
To eliminate noise effectively, you should first identify the noise source as  
follows:  
1. Stop transmission on the TEST menu, by turning ON “TX” in the TEST menu,  
and turn on the power of all on-board equipment one by one while observing  
the picture. If noise appears on the sonar display, that equipment is emitting  
noise. Check the offending equipment’s ground and installation.  
2. Run the boat at various speeds to check if the noise is speed dependent.  
If neither of the above two steps has effect on the picture, adjust one of the  
following:  
2.9.2  
Interference rejector  
This control is similar to the interference rejector on echo sounders and radars. It  
is effective for rejecting random noise and sea surface reflections in rough sea  
conditions. Set it so that noise is just eliminated. Do not use an unnecessarily  
high setting since it may also reject small wanted echoes.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select INT REJECT and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
interference rejection.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.9.3  
Changing Tx interval  
When other sonars nearby are operating the same transmission interval as that  
of own ship’s sonar, an interference ring appears on the display. To erase the  
interference ring from the screen, reduce the TX INTERVAL on the H-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
Interference  
Tx interval high  
Tx interval lowered  
How TX INTERVAL works  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select TX INTERVAL and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the longer the Tx interval. The  
setting 0 is same as the setting 9.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
Note: When the sonar is used in shallow water with the range set between 60 m  
and 200 m and Tx cycle at “9”, bottom reflections caused by the 2nd-to-the-last  
transmission may appear on near ranges. Lower the Tx interval by 2 or 3 steps  
to suppress them.  
2.9.4  
Shifting Tx frequency  
If interference cannot be suppressed by the interference rejector or Tx interval,  
shift the Tx frequency with FREQ SHIFT on the H-SCAN SETTING menu.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select FREQ SHIFT and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is -65 to +65.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.9.5  
Noise limiter  
Weak, unwanted reflections, colored light-blue or green, appear when the water  
is dirty, plankton layers exists, or due to ship’s noise. The noise limiter can  
reduce the effects of these unwanted reflections. Raising the setting causes  
unwanted reflections to be displayed in colors of blue to background color.  
Normally a setting of 3 or 4 is sufficient.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the H-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key  
3. Select NOISE LIMITER and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-15. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2.9.6  
2.9.7  
2.9.8  
Echo average  
Adjusts echo afterglow, which can be useful for watching echo movement in the  
H-SCAN SETTING menu. The setting range is 0-7. The higher the number the  
longer echoes remain on the screen.  
Reverberation reduction  
You may choose the length of reverberation for the echo signal in the H-SCAN  
SETTING menu. The larger the value the shorter the reverberation, which  
makes it easer to see the echo signal. The setting range is 0-3.  
Setting reference bearing for frequency change  
The FREQ/BEARING SET function in the H-SCAN SETTING menu is provided  
for avoiding interference from other equipment.  
If noise (interference) appears at a specific bearing, change the value of the  
FREQ/BEARING SET in the H-SCAN SETTING menu. The setting range is 0° to  
358°.  
Note: The FREQ/BEARING SET function is active only when the SIDELOBE  
SUPPRESSION on the SYSTEM MENU is set to 1 or 2. For details, contact a  
FURUNO agent or dealer.  
2.9.9  
Suppressing gain of bottom echo  
None-moving echoes such as bottom echo, plankton echo, etc., may be  
suppressed by the setting of BOTTOM SUPPRESS in the H-SCAN SETTING  
menu (moving echoes such as fish school are not effected by this setting). The  
setting range is 0 to 10. The greater the setting, the greater the suppression  
level of the bottom, etc.  
Note: Avoid using too high a setting - slow-moving fish school may be  
suppressed as well.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.9.10 Sidelobe suppression  
Sidelobes are fairly emissions generated outside the main beam. The energy of  
the sidelobe is fairly weak but when the water is comparatively shallow and the  
bottom is rocky and hard, strong signals are detected by the sidelobe.  
To reduce the effect of sidelobes, adjust SIDELOBE SUPPRESS from the  
H-SCAN SETTING menu. The setting range is –3 to +3 and the default setting is  
0. The higher the setting the greater the sidelobe suppression. If there is a  
difference between the port and starboard side images, use a minus setting.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.10 Adjusting Beamwidth  
The horizontal beamwidth of the Rx beam can be adjusted at the OTHERS  
menu as below to raise the horizontal resolution.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select H-SCAN SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
H-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
COLOR  
COLOR SETTING...  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE : COLOR CURVE 3  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
GAIN OFFSET  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
FAR TVG CURVE  
: 0  
: 0  
: TVG2  
ABSORPTION COEFF : 23.5dB  
TVG DISTANCE...  
2ND AGC DISTANCE : 0m  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: 200m  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG : 0  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR : 0  
GAIN CONTROL  
BEAMWIDTH...  
: NORMAL  
.OTHERS menu  
4. Select BEAMWIDTH and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog box.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
H-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
BEAMWIDTH  
BEAMWIDTH A : 0  
BEAMWIDTH B : 0  
5. Select BEAMWIDTH A and set appropriate value. The higher the setting the  
sharper the horizontal resolution. The setting range is -4 to 5 plus AR and the  
default setting is 0. AR means AUTO RANGE and it automatically adjusts  
horizontal beamwidth according to the range.  
6. Select BEAMWIDTH B and set appropriate value. This controls echo beam  
width by echo processing. The setting range is 0-5, and the higher the setting  
the greater the horizontal resolution.  
7. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
8. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.11 Tracking a Fish School (target lock)  
The target lock function automatically tracks a fish school so you won’t lose sight  
of it on the display. Two types of target lock are available: position tracking  
(TARGET MARK) and fish school tracking (FISH) and you may select one from  
the menu as below. Default setting is “FISH.” However, if the FSV-84 cannot  
receive an echo of sufficient level of echo, tracking may not be performed.  
2.11.1 Selecting target lock type  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select INITITAL SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select YES and press the [MENU] key to confirm the CAUTION indicated.  
5. Select TARGET LOCK and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
TARGET LOCK  
TRACKING METHOD  
TILT INTERLOCK  
: FISH  
:
TILT&RANGE  
MARK INTERLOCK  
TRACKING DATA  
THRESHOLD  
:
ESTIMATE MARK  
: H&V  
: 16  
BOTTOM THRESHOLD  
TARGET SPEED LIMIT  
SMOOTHING  
: 3  
: 5kt  
: 0.5  
TARGET SPD UPDATE  
: 60SEC  
TARGET LOCK WINDOW : NORMAL  
DIMENSION SETUP  
VOLUME SETUP  
: 25t/1000m2  
: 25t/1000m3  
TARGET LOCK menu  
6. Select TRACKING METHOD and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog  
box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
TARGET MARK  
FISH  
Target lock type dialog box  
7. Use the trackball to select TARGET MARK or FISH as appropriate and press  
the [MENU] key.  
8. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
9. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to quit  
all menus.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.11.2 Fish school tracking mode  
The automatic echo target lock function automatically tracks the  
operator-selected fish school. When menu option TILT INTERLOCK on the  
TARGET LOCK menu (previous page) is set to TILT & RANGE, and the tracked  
fish school goes out of the zone in the range direction, the range and tilt are  
automatically controlled according to the fish school position.  
1. Select FISH at step 7 in the procedure in section 2.11.1.  
2. Use the trackball to select the fish school to track on the horizontal display.  
3. Press the [TARGET LOCK] key.  
The target lock mark appears ( ) on the fish school with a vector extending  
from its edge. This vector shows estimated target position after elapsed of  
preset vector time. The target lock mark is also inscribed on the vertical  
display, however no vector appears.  
If the target is lost, the target lock mark changes to red color and the  
tracking mode changes to position mode (see next section) at that  
position.  
When the FSV-84 detects and tracks the target again, the mode returns to  
the fish school mode.  
4. To turn off the target lock, press the [TARGET LOCK] key again.  
Vector*  
Target lock mark  
Bearing mark  
follows target  
Fish school's track*  
when target  
lock is active.  
* Turned on or off  
from MARK DISPLAY  
TARGET LOCK DATA  
menu.)  
2975m (Horizontal range)  
153m (Depth)  
S
C
12.3kt (Speed)  
256° (Course)  
Target lock mark and target lock data  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.11.3 Position tracking mode  
This mode tracks a stationary position (such as a reef) using position data fed  
from a navigator.  
A
B
C
D
Depth  
E
How position tracking mode target lock works  
1. Select TARGET MARK at step 7 in the procedure in section 2.11.1.  
2. Use the trackball to select the location to track.  
3. Press the [TARGET LOCK] key to inscribe the target lock mark ( ) at the  
location selected. The target lock mark is also inscribed on the vertical  
display.  
Tilt, range and vertical bearing are automatically adjusted to track the location.  
Using the figure above as an example, the target lock mark is placed on location  
“E”. Then, the equipment remembers the location of “E” and automatically  
changes the tilt angle as the ship moves from position A through D. As long as  
the fish school “E” is stationary its echo is kept displayed on the screen.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.11.4 TARGET LOCK menu  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
TARGET LOCK  
TRACKING METHOD  
TILT INTERLOCK  
: FISH  
:
TILT&RANGE  
MARK INTERLOCK  
TRACKING DATA  
THRESHOLD  
:
ESTIMATE MARK  
: H&V  
: 16  
BOTTOM THRESHOLD  
TARGET SPEED LIMIT  
SMOOTHING  
: 3  
: 5kt  
: 0.5  
TARGET SPD UPDATE  
: 60SEC  
TARGET LOCK WINDOW : NORMAL  
DIMENSION SETUP  
VOLUME SETUP  
: 25t/1000m2  
: 25t/1000m3  
TARGET LOCK menu  
TRACKING METHOD: Selects tracking method, target mark (position) or fish.  
TILT INTERLOCK: Provides automatic change of tilt angle and range or tilt  
angle during target lock.  
MARK INTERLOCK: Selects items of numeric/graphic data display during target  
lock operation.  
TRACKING DATA: Selects which tracking data to use; horizontal, or both  
horizontal and vertical.  
THRESHOLD: Selects the weakest echo color number to track. The setting  
range is 1 to 30.  
BOTTOM THRESHOLD: When a target is judged as a bottom echo, raise this  
setting to differentiate bottom from target. The setting range is 0 to 5. The setting  
range is 0 to 5.  
TARGET SPEED LIMIT: Sets maximum fish speed to track. The setting range is  
1kt to 15kt.  
SMOOTHING: Sets smoothing rate for fish speed data. The setting range is 0.0  
to 1.0.  
TARGET SPD UPDATE: Sets fish speed data update interval among 15, 30, 45  
and 60 seconds.  
TARGET LOCK WINDOW: Selects size of target lock detection area; normal,  
large, largest. However, this area is not displayed on the screen.  
DIMENSION SETUP: Sets dimension constant for calculation of fish school  
tonnage from the fish school dimension.  
VOLUME SETUP: Sets volume constant for calculation fish school tonnage from  
fish school volume.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.12 Detecting Fish Schools Aurally  
Sometimes you may be preoccupied with other tasks and unable to concentrate  
on watching the sonar picture. In such cases it would be a good choice to use  
the audio function. This function enables you to monitor echoes from fish  
schools and seabed through the built-in speaker.  
After you’ve become accustomed to monitoring fish aurally, you should be able  
to detect a fish school from a range longer than you can detect it on the screen.  
In addition you may judge whether the fish school is approaching or going away;  
the tone becomes higher when the school is approaching and lowers when the  
school is going away.  
2.12.1 Selecting direction  
In the default setting, the audio function is on and the audio sector is 30°.  
1. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the direction you want to  
monitor through the speaker.  
2. Press the [R/B AUDIO] key.  
The audio bearing mark appears on the bearing selected, in a 30°, 60°, 90°,  
180° or 330° sector centering the audio bearing mark. Echoes are monitored  
through the speaker. You can adjust speaker volume with the [AUDIO] control.  
Note: When the trackball mark is placed near own ship mark and the [R/B  
AUDIO] key is pressed, the range mark and the related data at the bottom of the  
screen are erased. Note that the audio bearing is erased when “AUDIO” on the  
ALARM & AUDIO menu is turned off.  
A
Audio bearing mark  
Range mark  
R 400m  
B 45°  
Range and audio bearing  
marks data  
Range and audio bearing marks  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.12.2 Selecting audio sector  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ALARM & AUDIO and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ALARM & AUDIO  
FISH ALARM  
: OFF  
ALARM LEVEL  
ALARM ZONE...  
SHIP SPEED ALARM  
AUDIO  
: 16  
: ON  
: ON  
: 30°  
: 0  
AUDIO SECTOR  
REVERBERATION  
ALARM & AUDIO menu  
4. Select AUDIO SECTOR and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
30°  
60°  
90°  
180°  
330°  
Audio sector dialog box  
5. Select desired audio sector among 30°, 60°, 90°, 180°, 330° and press the  
[MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.12.3 Automatic training  
You may automatically scan the audio sector and audio bearing mark in the  
sector of 12°, 24° or 36° as below.  
1. First activate the range and audio bearing marks with the [R/B AUDIO] key.  
2. While pressing and holding down the [AUTO TRAIN] key, press the [R/B  
AUDIO] key to select desired auto train sector among 12°, 24°, 36° and OFF.  
Watch the auto train mark to know the currently selected sector. The chosen  
sector appears in large characters for five seconds at the top of the screen.  
To turn off automatic training, select OFF at step 2.  
Auto train mark  
Auto train sector  
A
Audio bearing  
mark  
Indications related to automatic training  
2.12.4 Reverberation  
You may choose the length of reverberation for the audio signal. The larger the  
value the longer the reverberation, which makes it easer to hear the audio signal.  
The setting range is 0-9 and the default setting is 0.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.13 Presentation Mode  
2.13.1 Presentation mode description  
This sonar has four presentation modes, head-up, north-up, course-up and true  
motion, and you may select one with PRESENTATION MODE in the OTHERS -  
DISPLAY SETTING menu.  
N
N
N
N
Head-up  
North-up  
Course-up  
True Motion  
Presentation modes  
Head-up: The display is oriented toward ship’s heading. Own ship position is  
fixed at the screen center. Echoes from fish and the bottom move on the screen  
relative to own ship’s movement. This mode is useful for general use.  
North-up: The display is oriented so North is at the top of the screen. Own ship  
position is fixed at the screen center and own ship mark pivots with ship’s  
movement. Echoes from fish and the bottom move on the screen relative to own  
ship’s movement.  
Course-up: The display is oriented according to course. Own ship position is  
fixed at the screen center. Echoes from fish and the bottom move on the screen  
relative to own ship’s movement. Targets are displayed at ship’s bow.  
True Motion: Stationary objects are fixed and own ship and fish echoes move  
on the display in accordance with their true courses and speeds. Thus you can  
observe own ship and fish echo movement with respect to the bottom. This  
mode requires speed and heading data. When own ship mark reaches an edge  
of the off-center effective area it is automatically returned to the screen center as  
below.  
N
N
Offcenter  
effective area  
(a) Own ship mark reaches  
an edge of offcenter  
effective area  
(b) Own ship mark is automatically  
returned to screen center  
Automatic return of own ship mark in true motion  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.13.2 How to select a presentation mode  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
DISPLAY SETTING  
DISPLAY MODE...  
MODE SELECTION  
TX/RX MODE  
: MODE KEY  
: ALTERNATIVE  
: LANDSCAPE  
H2/S DISPLAY  
PRESENTATION MODE : HEAD UP  
TM DISPLAY RANGE  
BEARING REF  
TILT LEVER  
: 1.6R  
: SHIP HEADING  
: TILT  
S AUTO OFF CENTER : OFF  
H-SLICE WIDTH  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC  
NET COURSE MARK  
MANUAL DEGAUSS  
AUTO DEGAUSS  
DIMMER  
: 16  
: KP SYNC  
: ENTER  
: EXECUTE  
: INT SENSOR  
: 10  
KEY BEEP VOLUME  
: 5  
DISPLAY SETUP menu  
4. Select PRESENTATION MODE and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog  
box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
HEAD UP  
NORTH UP  
COURSE UP  
TRUE MOTION  
Presentation mode dialog box  
5. Select presentation mode desired and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to quit  
all menus.  
Note: The true motion display range may be set to 1.3 or 1.6 times the range  
with TM DISPLAY RANGE on the DISPLAY SETTING sub menu.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.14 Fish Alarm  
The fish alarm sounds the aural alarm when a fish echo above a preset strength  
enters the operator-set alarm zone.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ALARM & AUDIO and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ALARM & AUDIO  
FISH ALARM  
: OFF  
ALARM LEVEL  
ALARM ZONE...  
SHIP SPEED ALARM  
AUDIO  
: 16  
: ON  
: ON  
: 30°  
: 0  
AUDIO SECTOR  
REVERBERATION  
ALARM & AUDIO menu  
4. Select FISH ALARM and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
OFF  
ON  
Fish alarm status dialog box  
5. Select ON, select QUIT and then press the [MENU] key. To cancel the fish  
alarm, select OFF instead of ON.  
6. Select ALARM ZONE and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the starting point of the  
alarm zone.  
8. Press the [MENU] key.  
9. Rotate the trackball clockwise to select the ending point. The display paints a  
fan-shaped alarm zone.  
10.Press the [MENU] key.  
11. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
<<ALARM ZONE SETTING>>  
PLACE CURSOR AT STARTING POINT  
AND PRESS MENU KEY TO SET.  
PRESS R/B KEY TO CANCEL.  
<<ALARM ZONE SETTING>>  
PLACE CURSOR AT ENDING POINT  
AND PRESS MENU KEY TO  
COMPLETE ALARM ZONE SETTING.  
How to set the fish alarm zone  
Note 1: There must be at least three degrees difference between the starting  
and ending points to get a fan-shaped alarm zone as shown in (a) and (b) below.  
Otherwise, the unit paints a 360-degree alarm zone as in (c) where there is less  
than 3 degrees between the starting and ending points and (d) where the  
bearing marker has been rotated one full turn.  
More than 3˚  
Within 3˚  
(a)  
(b)  
(c)  
(d)  
How to create desired alarm zone  
Note 2: The echo strength which triggers the alarm can be set with ALARM  
LEVEL on the ALARM & AUDIO menu. The setting range is 0-30.  
This value corresponds with the number of 32-echo colors.  
Note 3: To disable the fish alarm, choose OFF at step 5 in the procedure on the  
previous page.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.15 Relocating Fish School for Easy Observation  
Use the offcenter feature to relocate a fish school.  
1. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the position where you  
want to relocate the own ship mark.  
2. Press the [OFF CENTER] key.  
3. To move the own ship mark back to the screen center, press the [OFF  
CENTER] key again.  
Fish school  
Fish  
school  
Press [OFF CENTER] key  
Own ship  
mark  
Own ship mark  
moves to trackball  
mark position.  
Set trackball  
mark here,  
for example.  
How to use offcenter  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.16 Comparing Fish School Concentration  
You can get an estimate of the volume of two fish schools by using the two  
ESTIMATE keys as follows:  
1. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on a fish school, and then  
press the [ESTIMATE 1] key.  
2. The estimate mark appears on the fish school. Relative volume is shown by a  
figure between 0 and 100, below the estimate mark. When the area inside  
the mark is filled in reddish brown, volume figure is said to be “100”.  
3. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on another fish school and  
press the [ESTIMATE 2] key.  
4. Compare estimate figures for each fish school by observing estimate mark  
data and the fish histogram.  
5. To turn off the estimate marks press their respective keys.  
Estimate mark 2  
N
North  
mark  
2
1
85  
NUMERIC/  
Estimate  
mark 1  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
W
E
35  
DISPLAY  
2
S
Estimate mark 2 data  
Estimate mark 1 data  
Estimate marks and their data  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.17 Measuring Fish School Speed  
To ensure a good haul, it is important to estimate the direction and speed of the  
fish school before shooting the net. You can do this with the [FISH] key. With  
tidal current data plus fish speed data, you can determine the timing of the net  
shooting more efficiently. This function requires speed and heading data.  
2.17.1 Entering fish marks  
1. Place the trackball mark on the center of a fish school, and then press the  
[FISH] key. The latest fish mark ( ) appears on the fish school.  
2. Wait 1 to 2 minutes.  
3. Place the trackball mark on the same fish school selected in step 1 and press  
the [FISH] key. The latest fish mark appears on the target, the 2nd latest fish  
mark ( ) appears on the location selected at step 1 and any earlier fish  
marks are shown with an “X”. The distance between the two fish marks and  
fish school course and speed appear at the bottom right-hand corner of the  
horizontal display area.  
Earlier fish mark (max. 8)  
2nd latest fish mark  
Latest  
fish mark  
Latest fish  
mark  
WAIT 1-2  
MINUTES  
X
FISH MOVEMENT DATA  
(Distance moved)  
Place trackball mark  
on fish school's current  
location and press  
[FISH] key again.  
(Horizontal range to fish mark)  
2975m  
Place trackball mark  
on a fish school and  
press [FISH] key.  
153m (Depth)  
S 12.3kt (Speed)  
C
256° (Course)  
How to measure fish school speed  
Note 1: Fish movement is calculated using ship’s speed and heading data.  
Accordingly, pitching and rolling may affect the calculation. For best results, try  
the procedure two or three times to verify reliability.  
Note 2: The time and distance between pressings of the [FISH] key should be  
as long as possible to increase accuracy of measurement. For best results,  
repeat the procedure two or three times.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
Note 3: Each time the [FISH] key is pressed the latest fish mark and ship’s  
speed mark change in the sequence shown below.  
This data is the latest fish  
mark data.  
[FISH] key pressed once  
twice  
three times  
four times  
Fish mark  
2.17.2 Deleting fish marks  
Fish marks can be deleted individually with the [DELETE MARK] key or by  
earliest entry through the menu. Note that the [DELETE MARK] key also erases  
event marks.  
Deleting fish marks with the [DELETE MARK] key  
Use the trackball to place the trackball mark on the fish mark you want to erase.  
The color of the fish mark changes from white to red when the fish mark is  
correctly selected. Press the [DELETE MARK] key to delete the fish mark.  
Deleting fish marks through the menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ERASE MARKS and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ERASE MARKS  
EVENT MARK  
FISH MARK  
OWN SHIP POS MARK: DELETE  
SHIP'S TRACK : DELETE  
: DELETE  
: DELETE  
ERASE MARKS menu  
4. Select FISH MARK and press the [MENU] key. Each press of the [MENU]  
key deletes the earliest fish mark.  
5. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.18 Event Mark, Own Ship Position Mark  
The event mark is useful for finding the horizontal range, depth and bearing to a  
location some distance from current position. 10 such marks may be inscribed  
on the horizontal display. This function requires speed and heading data.  
There are two types of event marks, latest event mark () and event mark (+).  
Each time an event mark is entered the latest event mark appears at the  
trackball mark position and all other event marks are shown by the “plus” (+)  
mark and numbered in sequential order. When the memory capacity for event  
marks is reached the earliest event mark is automatically erased to make room  
for the latest.  
The own ship position mark ( , red) is used to mark current position.  
2.18.1 Entering an event mark  
1. Set the trackball mark where you want to place an event mark.  
2. Press the [EVENT] key. The horizontal range, depth and bearing to the event  
mark appear at the bottom left corner of the horizontal display area.  
234: Horizontal range (m) from own ship mark  
19: Present depth (m) to mark  
(35): Depth (m) of mark at moment EVENT key is pressed.  
B265: Present bearing (degree)  
Bottom left-hand corner of the screen  
Event mark data  
With speed and heading data the mark follows own ship’s movements. In the  
True Motion mode, the event mark is stationary. When the tilt angle is changed  
mark position changes with slant range. Note however that the mark’s position  
does not change when automatic tilt is active; the tilt center angle is used to  
position the mark.  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
Plotting an event mark on the display is equivalent to dropping a buoy with an  
anchoring chain that extends from surface to bottom. The buoy is fixed at its  
geographical location, but the marker on the display moves to a point where  
present beam plane intersects the anchor chain of the buoy as ship moves or  
the tilt angle is changed. This can be said about marks as well such as fish mark  
and trackball mark.  
(35)  
Stored when  
EVENT key is  
pressed.  
B
You observe picture from  
direction of mark.  
A
Event mark description  
2.18.2 Entering an own ship position mark  
Place the trackball mark close to the center of the own ship mark and press the  
[EVENT] key. Ten own ship position marks may be inscribed. When the capacity  
for own ship position marks is reached the earliest own ship position mark is  
automatically erased.  
2.18.3 Deleting an event mark, own ship position mark  
Event marks and own ship position marks can be deleted individually with the  
[DELETE MARK] key or by earliest entry through the menu.  
Deleting event marks, own ship position mark with the [DELETE MARK] key  
Use the trackball to place the trackball mark on the event mark or own ship  
position mark you want to erase. The color of the mark changes from white to  
red when the mark is correctly selected. Press the [DELETE MARK] key to  
delete the mark.  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
Deleting event marks, own ship position mark from the menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ERASE MARKS and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ERASE MARKS  
EVENT MARK  
FISH MARK  
OWN SHIP POS MARK: DELETE  
SHIP'S TRACK : DELETE  
: DELETE  
: DELETE  
ERASE MARKS menu  
4. Select EVENT MARK (or OWN SHIP POS MARK) and press the [MENU] key.  
Each pressing deletes the earliest event mark (or own ship position mark).  
5. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to quit  
all menus.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.19 Net Course Mark  
Before shooting the net, decide the shoot timing considering tide direction,  
distance to the fish school and moving direction of the fish school. Use the net  
course mark as a guide to decide the timing. This function requires speed and  
heading data.  
Inscribing the net course mark  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key to open the OTHERS menu.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key to open the DISPLAY  
SETTING menu.  
4. Select NET COURSE MARK and press the [MENU] key. Instructions for  
setting the net course mark appear on the display.  
Net course mark  
<<NET SHOOT SETTING>>  
PLACE NET SHOOT CIRCLE BY  
TRACKBALL AND PRESS MENU KEY TO SET.  
PRESS R/B KEY TO CANCEL.  
Net course mark  
5. Use the trackball to position the net course mark, which is shown by a  
dashed circle.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to set, and the dashed circle changes to a solid one.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to quit  
all menus.  
* To delete the net course mark, repeat the above procedure.  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.20 Observing Net Behavior  
With net sonde connection you can observe net behavior after the throwing of  
the net. Accurate depiction of net sonde position depends on proper setting of  
the distances between net sonde transmitters. You can set those distances on  
the OTHERS - INITIAL SETTING - NET SONDE SETTNG menu.  
This function requires speed and heading data.  
1. Press the [SHOOT] key just upon throwing the net into the water. The  
following actions occur:  
Net shoot mark ( ) appears at own ship position.  
Net shoot data appears.  
Net sonde mark is inscribed.  
Net depth data is displayed.  
Water depth data and water temperature data erased from own ship’s  
track.  
In an ES combination mode, tide data and net depth replace the water  
temperature graph.  
In an ES combination mode, the picture advance method changes to  
“speed sync.”  
In an ES combination mode, the picture advance width appears on the ES  
display.  
2. To erase the net sonde mark and associated data, press the [SHOOT] key  
again.  
NET SHOOT DATA  
Distance run from shooting of net  
Time elapsed from shooting of net  
N
N-UP H  
202m  
193m  
59m  
0.53NM  
5:32  
R
300m  
NUMERIC  
DATA  
AUTO  
T 17˚  
(21˚)  
G 10  
B
296˚  
DISPLAY  
P
8
85  
NET DEPTH  
S1 134m  
S2 178m  
W
E
2
1
2
S3 213m  
1
3
1
1
2
2
150  
2000  
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
3
S
Net shoot mark Net depth data  
Net sonde mark  
Net behavior  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.21 Storing, Recalling Picture  
The current picture can be stored in the memory, and recalled whenever desired.  
This feature is useful for analyzing echoes.  
2.21.1 Storing the picture  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select PRESET, MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD  
ASSIGN USER PROG...  
CLEAR F-KEY SETTING  
H/S-SCAN RANGE  
V-SCAN RANGE  
PICTURE SHOT  
PICTURE RECALL  
MEMORY CARD...  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu  
4. Select PICTURE SHOT and press the [MENU] key.  
5. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2.21.2 Recalling stored picture  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select PRESET, MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select PICTURE RECALL and press the [MENU] key to recall the picture  
stored in the memory.  
5. Press the [MENU] key to erase the message displayed.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.22 OTHERS Menu  
This section presents an overview of the OTHERS menu on the H-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
2.22.1 Displaying the OTHERS menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select H-SCAN SETTING and press the [MENU] key to open the H-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key to show the OTHERS menu.  
MENU  
H-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
COLOR  
COLOR SETTING...  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE : COLOR CURVE 3  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
GAIN OFFSET  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
FAR TVG CURVE  
: 0  
: 0  
: TVG2  
ABSORPTION COEFF : 23.5dB  
TVG DISTANCE...  
2ND AGC DISTANCE : 0m  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: 200m  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG : 0  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR : 0  
GAIN CONTROL  
BEAMWIDTH...  
: NORMAL  
OTHERS menu  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.22.2 OTHERS menu description  
COLOR: Select color arrangement to use. The default setting is COLOR 1.  
COLOR SETTING…: Customizes colors.  
1. Select COLOR SETTING from the OTHERS menu and press the [MENU]  
key. The following display appears.  
2. Use the trackball to select color to change and press the [MENU] key.  
Choose to register setting  
and close menu.  
H-SCAN COLOR 1  
QUIT  
Choose to cancel change.  
CANCEL  
Choose to restore  
default colors.  
DEFAULT  
QUIT  
Choose to quit.  
COL  
22  
HUE  
27  
SAT  
84  
LUM  
53  
CANCEL  
Choose to cancel.  
COL: Cycles through default colors.  
HUE: Adjusts color tint (Setting range: 0-100(%)).  
SAT (Saturation): Adjusts color vividness  
(Setting range: 0-100(%)).  
LUM (Luminescence): Adjusts color brightness  
(Setting range: 0-100(%)).  
COLOR SETTING menu  
3. Select S or T of item COL, HUE, SAT or LUM.  
4. Press the [MENU] key to change the setting.  
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change level of other items.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Repeat steps 2-6 to change other colors.  
8. Select QUIT at the top of the menu and press the [MENU] key  
9. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
finish.  
Note: If you get lost in operation and want to return to default colors, select  
DEFAULT and press the [MENU] key.  
COLOR RESPONSE: Color response defines reflected echo strength versus  
color level conversion. You can select one of four color response tables, and the  
default setting is COLOR RESPONSE 3.  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
COLOR RESPONSE…: Adjusts reflected echo strength versus echo color level  
for currently selected color response number.  
To adjust the curve, place the trackball at the point desired and press the  
[MENU] key. On the horizontal axis input level relative value is shown in the  
range from 0 to 100%. The setting range for input level is 0-100% in increments  
of 10% and output level is 0-100% in any value.  
To set input level versus output level, use the trackball to  
place the trackball mark on location desired and press the  
[MENU] key.  
DEFAULT CANCEL QUIT  
H-SCAN COLOR  
100  
DEFAULT: Select to restore default  
setting for selected color response.  
CANCEL: Select to cancel change.  
QUIT: Select to finish.  
80  
60  
40  
20  
Currently selected color  
Input level scale  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Color response curve  
GAIN OFFSET: Adjusts gain level. If the front panel [GAIN] control does not  
provide satisfactory gain adjustment, enter an offset here. The setting range is  
0-12.  
SIGNAL LEVEL: Dirty water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the  
screen in green or light-blue. These echoes may be erased in order of strength.  
The setting range is 0-15.  
FAR TVG CURVE: Selects the TVG curve to use. The setting range is  
TVG1-TVG4. The higher the setting the sharper the gain curve.  
ABSORPTION COEFF: Attenuation of the acoustic pulse underwater varies with  
sea area and water temperature. This menu item is provided to offset  
absorption; however, the default setting is suitable in most cases. If sensitivity  
decreases with distance, increase the absorption coefficient setting. And if it  
increases with distance decrease this setting.  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
TVG DISTANCE: Sets the TVG effective distance for near, medium and far  
ranges.  
Setting range  
NEAR: 50-150 m, 10 m increments  
MED: 300-500 m, 20 m increments  
FAR: 600-1000 m, 40 m increments  
To adjust a TVG curve, select S or T of item desired and press the [MENU] key  
to change the setting.  
Select to register  
setting and finish.  
QUIT  
NEAR  
100  
MED  
400  
FAR  
800  
Select to cancel  
change.  
CANCEL  
Select item with trackball  
and press [MENU] key to  
change setting.  
TVG setting window  
2ND AGC DISTANCE: Sets starting distance that 2nd AGC functions. The setting  
range is 0 to 2000 m, in increments of 20 m. Setting is invalid if display range is  
lower than this setting.  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: Sets Near AGC effective distance. Set the range  
between 20 m and 300 m, in increments of 20 m.  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG: Selects echo smoothing level in the range direction. The  
setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the smoothing.  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR: Selects echo smoothing level in circular direction. The  
setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the smoothing.  
GAIN CONTROL: If sensitivity is low even with maximum gain, change the  
setting to WIDE. This doubles the control range.  
BEAMWIDTH: Adjusts horizontal beamwidth. For further details see “2.10  
Adjusting Beamwidth”.  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.23 Interpreting the Horizontal Display  
This section provides information necessary for interpreting the horizontal  
display.  
2.23.1 Bottom echoes  
When the tilt angle is changed, the bottom echo illustrated below will appear on  
the display. When the tilt is decreased (toward 0°), the bottom trace becomes  
wider and weaker. By observing the bottom condition on the display, the skipper  
can prevent net damage.  
(A) Flat bottom  
Tilt angle: 10° to 15°  
Decreased tilt angle  
Only half of  
vertical beam width  
captures the bottom.  
(B) Flat bottom  
Tilt angle: 20° or more  
Bottom is displayed  
narrower and in  
stronger colors when  
compared to (A).  
(C) Sloping bottom  
Tilt angle: 20° or more  
Shallow bottom  
is displayed in  
a strong color  
and with a  
short tail.  
Bottom  
The deeper, sloping  
bottom echo is displayed  
in a weak color and  
with a long tail.  
Bottom echoes  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.23.2 Fish schools  
A fish school appears as a mass of echoes on the screen. The color of the mass  
shows the density of fish schools on the sonar beam. To find distribution and  
center point of a fish school, try several different tilt angles.  
(A) Sea surface fish  
Tilt angle: 0° to 10  
Bottom echo not  
displayed because  
of decreased tilt angle.  
Sea surface  
Fish  
school  
reflections are  
present.  
Sea surface  
reflections  
(B) Midwater, bottom fish  
Tilt angle: 30° or more  
Fish echo which appears before bottom can be detected.  
Bottom  
Fish  
school  
Large midwater  
fish school is  
present.  
Tilt angle: 0° to 20°  
Fish echo which appears together with  
or after bottom can be detected.  
Fish  
school  
Bottom  
When the tilt angle is shallow,  
the reflection echo from bottom  
is weak and the fish echo  
which appears from bottom  
is easy to find.  
Fish schools  
2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.23.3 Sea surface reflections  
To reduce sea surface reflections, set the tilt angle to 5° or higher, so the upper  
edge of the sonar beam does not hit the sea surface, or adjust TVG. When a  
decreased tilt angle is used, sea surface reflections cover a large area as  
illustrated below.  
Sea surface  
Tilt angle  
indication  
°
°
18  
Tilt: 0  
Sea surface  
reflections  
Sea surface  
°
°
Tilt: 8 -9  
°
18  
Sea surface reflections  
2.23.4 Wake  
A wake produced by own ship or another ship can be a strong reflecting object  
when a decreased tilt angle is used. As the wake appears as a thick continuous  
line, it can be easily distinguished from a fish school. A wake contains many air  
bubbles which attenuate ultrasonic energy, making it difficult to sound beyond  
the wake.  
Other  
ship  
Own  
ship  
Own ship's  
screw noise  
Wake produced  
by other ship  
Own ship's wake  
Own ship's  
screw noise  
(produced when  
own ship turned)  
Wake  
2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. HORIZONTAL MODE  
2.23.5 Sidelobe echoes (false echoes)  
An ultrasonic wave is emitted only in the direction set by the [TILT] control,  
however there are some emissions outside the main beam. These are called  
sidelobes. The energy of the sidelobe is fairly weak but when the water is  
comparatively shallow and the bottom is rocky and hard, strong signals are  
detected by the sidelobe. These are represented on the display as a false echo  
as shown below.  
Mainlobe echo  
Sidelobe echo  
Sidelobe  
Mainlobe  
The bottom echo  
detected by sidelobe  
appears at a certain  
tilt angle when the  
sidelobe points ver-  
tically. Also, poor  
soundome projection  
may result in a similar  
false echo.  
Sidelobe echoes  
2.23.6 Noise and interference  
When the fishing ground is crowded with many fishing boats, the sonar is subject  
to interference from ultrasonic equipment (echo sounder or sonar) on other  
boats as well as those on own ship.  
For instance, interference from the sonar operated on other boats will show itself  
on the display as in (A) in the figure below. This interference can be suppressed  
by changing the TX INTERVAL on the H-SCAN SETTING menu. Noise from  
marine life shows itself on the displays as in (B) in the figure below. This type of  
noise can be suppressed with the interference rejector on the H-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
(A) Inteference from  
other sonars (yours  
or other's)  
(B) Interference from  
marine life  
Noise and interference  
.
2-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.1  
Basic Operating Procedure  
4. Select vertical 1 or vertical 2 display.  
2. Lower transducer.  
: Mid protrusion  
: Full protrusion  
3. Adjust display brilliance.  
6. Press appropriate key.  
1. Turn on power.  
FSV-84  
V1/S  
HSV  
5. Set vertical  
bearing mark to  
display in vertical  
display.  
8. Select range.  
9. Adjust gain.  
7. Press to select vertical display if necessary.  
Control unit  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.2  
Vertical Mode Concept  
3.2.1  
Overview  
The vertical mode shows a vertical section of the horizontal display selected with  
the vertical bearing mark. The figure below illustrates the concept of the vertical  
mode, in comparison with the horizontal mode. The vertical mode helps you  
keep fast moving fish such as bonito and tuna within the sonar beam.  
Horizontal Mode  
Vertical Mode  
H-Beam  
V- Beam  
Vertical mode concept  
3.2.2  
Setting the vertical display  
1. Use the trackball to place the trackball marker at the desired location in the  
horizontal display.  
2. Press the [V1/S] or [V2] key.  
For example, press the [V1/S] key. Then, the Vertical 1 display appears, and the  
vertical bearing marker is displayed in the horizontal display, with “V” at the tip of  
the marker. If both vertical displays are activated, “1” or “2” is inscribed at the tip  
of a vertical bearing marker.  
Note: The TILT control functions as a bearing setting lever for the vertical  
display1 in the conditions mentioned below. The bearing of the vertical display1  
changes clockwise when the TILT control is pressed upward and  
counterclockwise when pressed downward, changing in increments of two  
degrees.  
The item TILT LEVER in the DISPLAY SETTING menu is set to “TILT & V1.”  
The vertical screen is chosen in the vertical mode.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.3 Vertical Mode Indications and Marks  
3.3.1  
Typical vertical display  
The vertical mode provides a vertical section of the horizontal picture. You may  
show the display on the right or left side of the screen in case of the vertical 1  
mode. An expansion mode is available to enlarge the picture. To display the  
vertical mode press the [MODE] key and choose V1, V1 & V2, V1 & ES1 or V1 &  
ES2.The example below shows the V1 mode.  
Vertical bearing mark  
(See next page.)  
Trackball data  
N
1547m  
Slant range  
V
1473m  
473m  
Horizontal range  
Vertical range  
Angle to trackball  
mark from  
A
33°  
horizontal  
Trackball mark  
position reference  
mark  
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
W
E
(See page 3-5.)  
DISPLAY  
000  
1500  
500  
00  
Vertical display 1  
1000  
12˚  
V
R 2000m  
G 8.0  
S
Tilt mark  
(Shows tilt angle set  
on horizontal display.)  
Target lock mark  
(Entered on  
horizontal display.)  
1500  
1000  
0  
Range scale  
(Displays horizontal  
range and depth.  
Grid inscribed  
in increments  
500  
of 1/4 of the range  
in use.)  
1000  
VERTICAL SCAN DATA  
Bearing, Range, Gain  
V 12°  
R 2000m  
G 8.0  
(Appears only in vertical 1 display;  
vertical scan data is common to  
both vertical 1 and vertical 2 displays.)  
Bottom echo  
Trackball mark  
Vertical 1 display indications and markers  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.3.2  
Vertical bearing mark, tilt mark  
The vertical bearing mark is displayed with solid and dashed lines and it shows  
the bearing selected on the horizontal display. The circle at the top of the vertical  
bearing mark has a “V” inside of it in the vertical 1 mode, or “1” and “2” as  
appropriate when both the vertical 1 and vertical 2 modes are active. Its bearing  
may be referenced to North (true) or ship’s heading (relative, default setting) on  
the menu.  
The tilt mark is a solid and dashed line which shows in the vertical display the tilt  
angle set on the horizontal display.  
The meaning of the solid and dashed lines are as shown in the table below.  
Solid Line  
Dashed Line  
Vertical Bearing Mark  
Tilt Mark  
Range from own ship to  
vertical scan range  
Range further than vertical  
scan range  
Range from own ship to  
horizontal scan range  
Range further than  
horizontal scan range  
V = Vertical 1  
1, 2 = Vertical 1, Vertical 2  
HR = Horizontal Range  
VR = Vertical Range  
HR  
V
VR  
Vertical bearing mark  
HR  
Tilt angle  
Tilt mark  
Tilt mark  
Vertical scan and horizontal scan ranges  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.3.3  
Trackball mark position reference mark  
The trackball mark position reference mark, a solid circle, is inscribed on the  
vertical bearing mark when the trackball mark is placed in the vertical display. Its  
purpose is to show corresponding trackball mark position on the horizontal  
display. It changes position with trackball mark position, tilt and range, and  
disappears when its position is no longer within the range of the horizontal  
display.  
VERTICAL  
DISPLAY  
V (Vertical 1), or  
1 or 2 (Vertical 2)  
V
Vertical  
bearing  
mark  
Trackball  
mark position  
reference  
mark  
Tilt mark  
Trackball mark  
Vertical bearing mark, trackball mark position reference mark  
.
3.4  
Auto Train  
You may scan the vertical bearing mark in the sector of OFF, 12°, 24° and  
36°.  
1. Press and hold down the [AUTO TRAIN] key while pressing the [V1/S] or [V2]  
key to choose auto train sector desired. Selected sector appears in large  
characters for five seconds for your confirmation.  
Auto train mark  
Auto train sector  
1
Vertical bearing  
mark  
Auto train  
2. To quit the auto train, set OFF at the step 1.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.5  
Display Range  
The [RANGE] control selects the detection range. The range selected is  
momentarily displayed in large characters at the center of the vertical 1 display.  
Range is always displayed at the lower part of the vertical 1 display.  
Below are the default ranges (in meters).  
Range Setting  
Range  
1
2
3
4
5
6
100  
200  
400  
600  
800  
1000  
1. Press the [HSV] key to show the gain and range indications of the vertical  
mode in yellow.  
2. Operate the [RANGE] control to select desired range.  
Note: Ranges may be preset as desired on the PRESET, MEMORY CARD  
menu. For further details, see V-SCAN RANGE on page 9-5.  
3.6 Measuring the Range  
Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the vertical 1 (or vertical 2)  
display. The range to the location selected is shown at the top left corner.  
Trackball data  
Slant range  
Horizontal range  
Vertical range  
Angle to trackball  
mark from  
N
1547m  
V
1473m  
473m  
A
33°  
horizontal  
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
Trackball mark  
position  
W
E
34 56.789N  
°
123 45.678E  
°
DISPLAY  
000  
1500  
500  
00  
1000  
V
12°  
R 2000m  
G 8.0  
S
Trackball mark  
Measuring range with the trackball  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.7  
Eliminating Weak Echoes  
Echoes from targets such as bottom and fish return to the transducer in order of  
distance to them, and when we compare their intensities at the transducer face,  
those from nearer targets are generally stronger when their reflecting properties  
are nearly equal. The sonar operator will be quite inconvenienced if these  
echoes are directly displayed on the screen, since he cannot judge the actual  
size of the target from the size of echoes displayed on the screen. To overcome  
use the TVG function. It compensates for propagation loss of sound in water;  
amplification of echoes on short range is suppressed and gradually increased as  
range increases so that similar targets are displayed in the similar intensities  
irrespective of the ranges to them.  
The FSV-84 has three TVG functions, NEAR, MEDIUM and FAR, and they  
mainly compensate for propagation loss on short, middle and long ranges  
respectively, centered at the ranges as shown in the figure at the bottom of page  
2-13. The higher the TVG setting the greater the amplification of echoes.  
The TVG is also used to suppress unwanted echoes and noise which appear in  
a certain range area on the screen such as sea surface reflections and cruising  
noise. To set TVG properly, do the following:  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
TX PULSE LENGTH-H : 9  
TX POWER-H  
TVG-NEAR-H  
TVG-MEDIUM-H  
TVG-FAR-H  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AGC-H  
: 0  
2ND AGC-H  
ECHO AVERAGE-H  
COLOR-H  
: 0  
: 0  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE-H : COLOR CURVE 3  
H-SCAN SETTING...  
V-SCAN SETTING...  
OTHERS...  
Main Menu  
2. Select V-SCAN SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
V-SCAN SETTING  
TX PULSE LENGTH  
TVG-NEAR  
: 7  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 2  
TVG-MEDIUM  
TVG-FAR  
NOISE LIMITER  
REVERBERATION  
: 0  
SIDELOBE SUPPRESS : 0  
AGC  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
2ND AGC  
NEAR AGC  
ECHO AVERAGE  
INT REJECT  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
BOTTOM SUPPRESS  
FREQ SHIFT  
OTHERS...  
V-SCAN SETTING menu  
3. Select TVG-NEAR with the trackball and press the [MENU] key.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
TVG setting dialog box  
4. Use the trackball to select S (raise setting) or T (lower setting) and press  
the [MENU] key. The setting range is –5 to 5. The higher the setting the  
further the TVG works.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set TVG-MEDIUM and TVG-FAR.  
When sea surface reflections or plankton layers disturb the picture, decrease  
appropriate TVG option by one or two steps.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
When a fish school is located on a long-range setting (about 800 meters) and  
is approaching own ship do as follows:  
Adjust the tilt to keep the fish school in the center of the sonar beam, namely,  
fish school is displayed in strongest colors possible. Confirm that the fish  
echo is displayed in the same color as it approaches. If the color suddenly  
changes to weaker colors as the fish enters MEDIUM and NEAR areas, the  
TVG is improperly set. Adjust the TVG. If this again produces sea surface  
reflections and noise try to remove them with AGC and NL controls.  
Note: If the above procedure does not produce satisfactory results, the TVG  
curve can be changed on the V-SCAN SETTING menu. Also refer to section  
3.8.4 “Adjust Near AGC”.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.8  
Suppressing Bottom Tail  
3.8.1  
Adjust AGC  
The AGC functions to automatically reduce the receiver gain only against strong  
echoes such as the bottom or a large fish school. Since weak echoes remain  
unaffected, a small fish school becomes easier to detect. Adjust it so that the  
AGC works only on bottom reflections. Do not set it too high; weak echoes may  
be missed.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select V-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3.8.2  
Decrease pulse length  
The pulse length determines the length of the transmission pulse emitted into the  
water. While a longer pulse is advantageous for long-range sounding, it has the  
disadvantage of being poor in discrimination of targets, that is, ability to separate  
several closely located targets. When searching bottom fish, therefore, it is  
useful to shorten the pulse length in order to separate fish echoes from bottom  
reflections. Decrease the pulse length setting to shorten the pulse length. For  
search of surface and midwater fish in which bottom reflections are not so strong,  
use the longest pulse length “9”.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select the V-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select TX PULSELENGTH and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the longer the pulse length.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.8.3  
Adjust 2nd AGC  
When an excessively strong echo is received in shallow or heavily sedimented  
waters, you may not be able to suppress it by the TVG control alone. In this case,  
a fish school which is displayed at more than 300 m away may disappear  
gradually when the ship is approaching the fish school.  
Use the Near TVG feature to suppress this strong echo. Normally set it between  
3 and 4, however, this setting depends on the sea area. Do not set it too high; all  
echoes (including noise) from near distance may be painted in red.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the V-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select 2ND AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-12. The higher the setting the greater the suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3.8.4  
Adjust Near AGC  
Sometimes excessively strong echo is received at a shallow area or an area  
which exists thick, polluted sea layer, which may not be corrected by the normal  
TVG setting. In this case, for example, fish school which is displayed at more  
than 300 m may disappears gradually when the ship is approaching to the fish  
school.  
The Near AGC functions to suppress this reduction of gain. Normally set 3 to 4,  
however, this setting depends on a sea area. Do not set it too high; echoes from  
near distance may become clear red.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select V-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select NEAR AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-10. The higher the setting the greater the echo level of  
near distance.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.9  
Rejecting Interference and Noise  
While observing the vertical mode display, you may encounter occasional or  
intermittent noise and interference. These are mostly caused by on-board  
electronic equipment, engine or propeller noise, or electrical noise from other  
sonars being operated nearby.  
3.9.1  
Identifying noise source  
To eliminate noise effectively, you should first identify the noise source as  
follows:  
1. Stop transmission from the TEST menu and turn on the power of all on-board  
equipment one by one while observing the picture.  
2. Run the boat at various speeds to check if the noise is speed dependent.  
If neither of the above two steps has effect on the picture, do one of the  
following:  
3.9.2  
Interference rejector  
This control is similar to the interference rejector on echo sounders and radars. It  
is effective for rejecting random noise and sea surface reflections in rough sea  
conditions. Set it so that noise is just eliminated. Do not use an unnecessarily  
high setting since it may also reject small wanted echoes.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the V-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select INT REJECT and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
interference rejection.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.9.3  
Noise limiter  
Weak, unwanted reflections, colored light-blue or green, appear when the water  
is dirty, plankton layers exists, or due to ship’s noise. The noise limiter can  
reduce the effects of these unwanted reflections. Raising the setting causes  
unwanted reflections to become colors of blue to background color. Normally a  
setting of 3 or 4 is sufficient.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the V-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select NOISE LIMITER and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-15. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3.9.4  
Shifting Tx frequency  
If interference cannot be suppressed by the interference, shift the Tx frequency  
with FREQ SHIFT on the V-SCAN SETTING menu.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the V-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select FREQ SHIFT and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is -65 to +65.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3.9.5  
3.9.6  
Echo average  
The ECHO AVERAGE in the V-SCAN SETTING menu adjusts echo afterglow,  
which can be useful for watching echo movement. The setting range is 0-7. The  
higher the number the longer echoes remain on the screen.  
Reverberation reduction  
You may choose the length of reverberation for the echo signal in the V-SCAN  
SETTING menu. The larger the value the shorter the reverberation, which marks  
it easer to see the echo signal. The setting range is 0-3.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.9.7  
Suppressing gain of bottom echo  
None-moving echoes such as bottom echo, plankton echo, etc., may be  
suppressed by the setting of BOTTOM SUPPRESS in the V-SCAN SETTING  
menu (moving echoes such as fish school are not effected by this setting). The  
setting range is 0 to 10. The greater the setting, the greater the suppression  
level of the bottom, etc.  
Note: The excessive setting may suppress slow-moving fish school as well.  
3.9.8  
Suppressing sidelobes  
Sidelobes on the vertical display can be suppressed in the vertical direction, with  
SIDELOBE SUPPRESS on the V-SCAN SETTING menu. The setting range is 0  
to 3 and 0 is OFF. The higher the setting the greater the suppression.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.10 Adjusting Beamwidth  
The vertical beamwidth of the Rx beam can be adjusted on the OTHERS menu  
to reduce surface reflections.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select V-SCAN SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
V-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
COLOR  
COLOR SETTING...  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE : COLOR CURVE 3  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
GAIN OFFSET  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
FAR TVG CURVE  
: 0  
: 0  
: TVG 2  
ABSORPTION COEFF : 23.5dB  
TVG DISTANCE...  
nd  
2
AGC DISTANCE : 0 m  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: 200 m  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG : 0  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR : 0  
BEAMWIDTH...  
DISPLAY POSITION LEFT  
VERTICAL SIZE  
FULL  
OTHERS menu  
4. Select BEAMWIDTH and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
V-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
BEAMWIDTH  
BEAMWIDTH A : 0  
BEAMWIDTH B : 0  
Dialog box  
5. Select BEAMWIDTH A and set appropriate value. The higher the setting the  
sharper the horizontal resolution. The setting range is -4 to 5 plus AR and the  
default setting is 0. AR means AUTO RANGE and it automatically adjusts  
horizontal beamwidth according to the range.  
6. Select BEAMWIDTH B and set appropriate value. This controls echo beam  
width by echo processing. The setting range is 0-5, and the higher the setting  
the greater the horizontal resolution.  
7. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.11 Vertical Expansion Display  
The vertical expansion display enlarges the selected vertical display. Set the  
trackball mark on the desired location in the vertical 1 or vertical 2 display as  
desired and then press the [V1/S] or [V2] key, whichever is appropriate.  
N
1547m  
1300m  
850m  
12  
R
2000m  
N-UP  
V
AUTO T 17  
(21  
)
B
G 10  
P
8
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
E
DISPLAY  
1000  
1500  
250  
500  
V
12  
R 2000m  
G 8.0  
Vertical 1 expansion display  
To quit the expansion display, press the [V1/S] or [V2] key.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.12 OTHERS Menu  
This section presents an overview of the OTHERS menu on the V-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
3.12.1 Displaying the OTHERS menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select V-SCAN SETTING and press the [MENU] key to open the V-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key to open the OTHERS menu.  
MENU  
V-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
COLOR  
COLOR SETTING...  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE : COLOR CURVE 3  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
GAIN OFFSET  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
FAR TVG CURVE  
: 0  
: 0  
: TVG 2  
ABSORPTION COEFF : 23.5dB  
TVG DISTANCE...  
nd  
2
AGC DISTANCE : 0 m  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: 200 m  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG : 0  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR : 0  
GAIN CONTROL  
BEAMWIDTH...  
: WIDE  
DISPLAY POSITION LEFT  
VERTICAL SIZE FULL  
OTHERS menu  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.12.2 OTHERS menu description  
COLOR: Select color arrangement to use. The setting range 1-4.  
COLOR SETTING: Customizes colors on the vertical display. Operation is same  
as that for the horizontal display. For further details see “COLOR SETTING…”  
on page 2-48.  
COLOR RESPONSE: Color response defines reflected echo strength versus  
color level conversion. You can select one of four color response tables, and the  
setting range is 1-4.  
COLOR RESPONSE…: Adjusts reflected echo strength versus echo color level  
for currently selected color response number. Operation is the same as that for  
the horizontal display. For further details see “COLOR RESPONSE…” on page  
2-48.  
GAIN OFFSET: Adjusts gain level. If the front panel [GAIN] control does not  
provide satisfactory gain adjustment, enter an offset here. The setting range is  
0-12.  
SIGNAL LEVEL: Dirty water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the  
screen in green or light-blue. These echoes may be erased in order of strength.  
Select the signal level to erase with the trackball and press the [MENU] key. The  
setting range is 0-15.  
FAR TVG CURVE: Selects the TVG curve to use. The smaller the number the  
gentler the gain change over distance.  
ABSORPTION COEFF: Attenuation of the acoustic pulse underwater varies with  
sea area and water temperature. This menu item is provided to offset absorption,  
however the default setting is suitable in most cases. If sensitivity decreases with  
distance, increase the absorption coefficient setting. And if it increases with  
distance decrease this setting.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
TVG DISTANCE…: Sets the TVG effective distance for near, medium and far  
ranges.  
Setting range  
NEAR: 50-150 m, 10 m increments  
MED: 300-500 m, 20 m increments  
FAR: 600-1000 m, 40 m increments  
To adjust a TVG curve, select or of item desired and press the [MENU] key  
to change the setting.  
Select to register  
setting and finish.  
QUIT  
NEAR  
100m  
MED  
400m  
FAR  
800m  
Select to cancel  
change.  
CANCEL  
Select item with trackball  
and press [MENU] key to  
change setting.  
Setting window  
2ND AGC DISTANCE: Sets starting distance that 2nd AGC functions. The setting  
range is 0 to 2000 m, in increments of 20 m. Setting is invalid if display range is  
lower than this setting.  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: Sets Near AGC effective distance. Set the range  
between 20 m and 300 m in increments of 20 m.  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG: Selects echo smoothing level in the range direction. The  
setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the smoothing.  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR: Selects echo smoothing level in circular direction. The  
setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the smoothing.  
GAIN CONTROL: If sensitivity is low even with maximum gain, change the  
setting to WIDE. This doubles the control range.  
BEAMWIDTH: See page 3-15.  
DISPLAY POSITION: Selects where to display the vertical display, left side or  
right side. Left side is the default setting.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
VERTICAL SIZE: Selects display size from full and half. Choose “half” to expand  
the effective viewing area on the horizontal display, The ratio for the full-size  
display is H4:V3 and H4:V2 for the half-size display.  
4
3
2
1
Full Size  
Half Size  
Display size  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.13 Application to Bonito and Tuna Fishing  
Tracking of bonito and tuna presents a special challenge to the sonar operator:  
He must try to keep them within the sonar beam, a formidable task considering  
their high speed and penchant for leaping and diving. The FSV-84, however, with  
its vertical beam, makes this task easier.  
3.13.1 Searching  
Neither the naked eye nor binoculars can continually track fish schools which  
make lightning quick runs between the surface and midwater. A sonar, however,  
provides a continuous view of several hundred meters of sea area around the  
boat, both at the surface and below it.  
3.13.2 Tracking  
If you are visually tracking a fish school which characteristically leaps and dives  
regularly, or a school with a flock of birds hovering over it, the school will scatter  
once the vessel approaches, thus you will lose sight of the school. This sonar  
provides continuous pictures of underwater conditions, so you can always know  
where a fish school is. For tracking the schools which leap and dive often the  
vertical mode is especially effective.  
Tracking  
3.13.3 Approaching  
The sonar lets you view fish school movement continuously, thus you can  
approach a school confident of a good catch.  
While a flock of birds hovering over the sea surface is usually a good indication  
of the presence of a fish school, the sonar can better verify fish school size.  
Approaching  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. VERTICAL MODE  
3.13.4 Catching  
While the sonar operator monitors the sonar for other fish schools, the crew can  
scatter bait and water to attract fish to the boat.  
Catching  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.1  
Basic Operating Procedure  
4. Select single "S" mode or combination "S" mode.  
2. Lower transducer.  
: Mid protrusion  
: Full protrusion  
3. Adjust display brilliance.  
9. Push applicable key.  
(For setting train angle.)  
V1: Left, V2: Right  
1. Turn on power.  
FSV-84  
V1/S  
HSV  
6. Select range.  
8. Adjust tilt.  
7. Adjust gain.  
5. Select mode (horizontal/vertical, H1/H2)  
for range and gain adjustment.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.2  
Indications and Marks  
4.2.1  
Slant mode single display  
The slant mode provides a half-circle (180°) picture, with own ship at the center.  
To choose the slant mode single display, press the [MODE] key to choose “S”.  
(Presetting of DISPLAY MODE on the DISPLAY SETTING menu is required.)  
Train angle mark  
Net shoot data  
Fish track  
Distance run from shooting  
Time from shooting  
Presentation mode  
Target lock mark  
Fish movement vector  
Scan data  
Range  
Trackball data  
N
Slant range  
Horizontal range  
Depth  
Relative bearing  
or True bearing*  
Current auto tilt  
N-UP S  
148m  
142m  
45m  
0.51NM  
5:32  
R
400m  
°
T 17  
(Auto train angle  
Train angle**  
Gain  
°
(21 )  
°
BO 50  
°
B
115  
G 10  
P8  
W
12m/s  
User program no.  
Fish mark  
S
Wind speed, direction*  
Latest event mark  
Auto train mark  
Latest fish mark  
Line connecting  
fish marks  
A
Fish estimate mark  
Fish estimate mark no.  
Fish estimate mark data  
Trackball mark  
Audio bearing mark  
1
Heading mark  
North mark*  
Own ship mark  
W
E
1
3
85  
2
Current (tide)  
mark*  
3
1
2
3
Range ring  
Bearing scale  
Event mark  
2
1
1
Own ship position mark  
Ship's track*  
2
150  
2
3
1
1
2
3
Event mark data  
158m  
48m  
(210m)  
1
230m  
70m  
2
3
Horizontal range  
Present depth  
Depth at measured  
Relative bearing  
or True bearing*  
* Requires appropriate  
sensor.  
S 12.3kt  
R 146m  
34°56.789N  
123°45.678E  
°
°
°
290  
B
330  
C
262  
B
S
Target lock/fish movement data  
Horizontal range  
Depth  
Speed  
Course  
Range ring  
data  
Net shoot  
mark  
Range  
mark  
Net  
sonde mark*  
Range mark and  
audio bearing  
mark data  
Trackball mark  
position  
** The slant mode provides a half-circle display. Other than the train angle indication,  
the indications are the same as those on the horizontal display.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.2.2  
Slant mode combination display  
The slant mode combination display shows one of four kinds of horizontal  
display combinations: LANDSCAPE, PORTRAIT, RIGHT INSET and LEFT  
INSET.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
TX PULSE LENGTH-S : 9  
TX POWER-S  
TVG-NEAR-S  
TVG-MEDIUM-S  
TVG-FAR-S  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
AGC-S  
: 0  
2ND AGC-S  
ECHO AVERAGE-S  
COLOR-S  
: 0  
: 0  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE-S : COLOR CURVE 3  
S-SCAN SETTING...  
V-SCAN SETTING...  
OTHERS...  
Main Menu  
2. Select OTHERS with the trackball and press the [MENU] key to open the  
OTHERS menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
ES1 SETTING...  
ES2 SETTING...  
ERASE MARKS...  
DISPLAY SETTING...  
ALARM & AUDIO...  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD...  
INITIAL SETTING...  
OTHERS menu  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key to open the DISPLAY  
SETTING menu.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
DISPLAY SETTING  
DISPLAY MODE...  
MODE SELECTION  
TX/RX MODE  
: MODE KEY  
: ALTERNATIVE  
: LANDSCAPE  
H2/S DISPLAY  
PRESENTATION MODE : HEAD UP  
TM DISPLAY RANGE  
BEARING REF  
TILT LEVER  
: 1.6R  
: SHIP HEADING  
: TILT  
S AUTO OFF CENTER : OFF  
H-SLICE WIDTH  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC  
NET COURSE MARK  
MANUAL DEGAUSS  
AUTO DEGAUSS  
DIMMER  
: 16  
: KP SYNC  
: ENTER  
: EXECUTE  
: INT SENSOR  
: 10  
KEY BEEP VOLUME  
: 5  
DISPLAY SETTING menu  
4. Select H2/S DISPLAY and press the [MENU] key.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
LANDSCAPE  
PORTRAIT  
RIGHT INSET  
LEFT INSET  
Dialog box for setting slant combination display  
5. Select the desired combination with the trackball and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key to finish.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
N
N-UP  
3902m  
3678m  
1346m  
278˚  
9.83NM  
5:32  
H1  
R
4000m  
AUTO  
T 17˚  
(21˚)  
G 10.0  
B
W
12m/s  
P
8
H1 display  
1
85  
1
1
2
N
H2  
R
1000m  
T 24˚  
G
P
7.5  
6
1
Slant display  
2975m  
156m  
(164m)  
128˚  
2975m  
153m  
12.3kt  
256˚  
32˚52.150N  
132˚12.150E  
S
C
R
B
1056m  
234˚  
1
2
B
LANDSCAPE  
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
DISPLAY  
PORTRAIT  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
N
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
W
E
N
DISPLAY  
0  
3
1
2
3
S
LEFT INSET  
N
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
W
E
1
2
DISPLAY  
3
30
S
RIGHT INSET  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.3  
Display Range  
The [RANGE] control selects the detection range. The range selected is  
momentarily displayed in large characters at the top of the screen. Range is  
always displayed at the top right hand corner of the screen.  
SEA SURFACE  
on the screen.  
Range indicated  
BOTTOM  
Range concept  
Below are the default ranges (in meters).  
Range Setting  
Range  
1
2
3
4
5
6
100  
200  
400  
600  
800  
1000  
1. If the slant display or slant combination display is active, press the [HSV] key  
to choose the slant mode.  
Range and gain indications for the slant display are shown in yellow.  
2. Operate the [RANGE] control to select desired range.  
Note 1:Ranges may be preset as desired on the PRESET, MEMORY CARD  
menu. For further details, see H/S-SCAN RANGE on page 9-5.  
Note 2: With the target lock feature active, range is automatically changed  
according to target position. (INTERLOCK on the TARGET LOCK menu is set to  
the option TILT&RANGE.)  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.4  
Tilt Angle  
The tilt angle shows the direction to which the sound wave is emitted. When the  
sound wave is emitted horizontally, the tilt angle is said to be 0° and when  
vertically, 90°. The tilt angle can be set between –5°(upward) to 90° (downward),  
in increments of 1°. The tilt angles for horizontal 1 and horizontal 2 modes can  
be set independently of one another. For further details, see section 4.4.4 and  
4.4.5.  
4.4.1  
Setting the tilt angle  
To manually set a tilt angle, operate the [TILT] control. Watch the tilt angle  
indication and tilt angle indicator at the top right corner of the screen.  
Select tilt angle depending on target fish. For surface fish select a shallow angle  
(about 5°) and for bottom fish, a deep angle.  
-5-degree  
0-degree horizontal direction (tilt angle 0-degree)  
Transducer  
Tilt angle setting range  
+90-degree  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.4.2  
Automatic tilt  
The [AUTO TILT] key automatically scans the tilt angle within the selected width.  
This is useful when you want to find the center depth of a fish school.  
1. Press the [AUTO TILT] key to select auto tilt angle desired. Each time the  
[AUTO TILT] key is pressed the auto tilt angle changes in the following  
sequence.  
OFF →  
[
1 - 4°  
]
[
2 - 6°  
]
[
3 - 8°  
]
(Narrow)  
(Wide)  
OFF →  
[
2 - 10°  
]
[
4 - 16°  
]
[
6 - 20°  
]
Automatic tilt range (narrow) with AUTO TILT key  
Range  
Width (1)  
Width (2)  
Width (3)  
Period  
60, 100  
150, 200  
300, 400  
500, 600  
700, 800  
900, 1000  
1100 and more  
4°∗  
2°  
1°  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
6°∗  
4°∗  
2°  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
8°∗  
6°∗  
4°∗  
3°  
As above  
As above  
As above  
Period: One trans.  
Tilt angle changes  
in 2° increments for  
asterisk-marked  
width;  
1° increments for  
all other widths.  
Automatic tilt range (wide) with AUTO TILT key  
Range  
Width (1)  
Width (2)  
Width (3)  
Period  
60, 100  
150, 200  
300, 400  
500, 600  
700, 800  
900, 1000  
1100 and more  
10°  
As above  
As above  
8°  
6°  
4°  
2°  
16°  
20°∗  
As above  
As above  
As above  
16°  
12°  
6°  
Period: One trans.  
Period: Four trans.  
Period: Two trans.  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Same as above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
12°  
8°  
4°  
* For the H1/S combination display, two transmissions/period at depth  
between 60 and 200 m and one transmission/period for range 300 m or  
greater.  
Note: Wide tilt angle is activated from the SYSTEM menu. For further details,  
contact your dealer.  
2. Auto tilt begins, with the tilt angle set with the [TILT] control as the center tilt  
angle.  
3. If necessary, change center tilt angle with the [TILT] control.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
For example, when the [RANGE] control, [TILT] control and [AUTO TILT] key are  
set to 800 m, 8° and width (1) respectively, the tilt angle changes at each  
transmission as follows:  
8°9°8°7°8°  
Tilt angle setting  
Auto tilt concept  
Note: The [AUTO TILT] key is inoperative when the target lock function is active  
or is made active. Once the target lock is turned off auto tilt operation is  
resumed.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.5  
Auto Training  
This feature provide automatic training of the Tx and Rx beams in left and right  
directions to enable search over a wide area.  
1. Press the [V1/S] or [V2] key to set center angle for automatic training.  
Each press of those keys displays center angle for automatic training at the  
center of the screen.. Operate [V1/S] to change training rightward; [V2] to  
change training leftward.  
2. While pressing the [AUTO TRAIN] key press the [V1/S] key to set train angle.  
The choices are ±30°, ±90°, ±120° and OFF..  
Bow  
Train center angle  
Train angle  
Auto train is automatically cancelled when target lock is activated, and the train  
angle is set where the target lock mark is entered. When target lock is disabled,  
auto train resumes from the bearing in use at the time of deactivation of target  
lock. Auto train cannot be activated if target lock is currently active.  
4.6 Measuring Range and Bearing to a Target  
Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the target you want to  
measure the range and bearing. The range, bearing and depth to the target  
appear at the upper left corner of the screen.  
B
TRACKBALL DATA  
Trackball mark  
Slant range  
Horizontal range  
Depth  
Heading line  
B Relative or  
True bearing*  
Own ship mark  
* Four display formats  
available. See OTHER  
MARKS on page 9-11.  
34 56.789N  
°
°
Trackball mark  
L/L position  
123 45.678E  
Location of trackball data  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.7  
Eliminating Weak Echoes  
Echoes from targets such as bottom and fish return to the transducer in order of  
distance to them, and when we compare their intensities at the transducer face,  
those from nearer targets are generally stronger when their reflecting properties  
are nearly equal. The sonar operator will be quite inconvenienced if these  
echoes are directly displayed on the screen, since he cannot judge the actual  
size of the target from the size of echoes displayed on the screen. To overcome  
this inconvenience, use the TVG function. It compensates for propagation loss of  
sound in water; amplification of echoes on short range is suppressed and  
gradually increased as range increases so that similar targets are displayed in  
the similar intensities irrespective of the ranges to them.  
The FSV-84 has three TVG functions, NEAR, MEDIUM and FAR, and they  
mainly compensate for propagation loss on short, middle and long ranges  
respectively, centered at the ranges shown below. The higher the TVG setting  
the greater the amplification of echoes.  
Note: TVG distances can  
be adjusted from the  
menu.  
See page 4-43.  
Principle of TVG  
The TVG is also used to suppress unwanted echoes and noise which appear in  
a certain range area on the screen such as sea surface reflections and cruising  
noise. To set TVG properly, do the following:  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select S-SCAN SETTING with the trackball and press the [MENU] key to  
open the S-SCAN SETTING menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
S-SCAN SETTING  
TX INTERVAL  
: 9  
: 9  
TX PULSE LENGTH  
TX POWER  
TVG-NEAR  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 2  
TVG-MEDIUM  
TVG-FAR  
NOISE LIMITER  
REVERBERATION  
: 0  
SIDELOBE SUPPRESS : 1  
AGC  
: 0  
: 0  
2ND AGC  
NEAR AGC  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
ECHO AVERAGE  
INT REJECT  
BOTTOM SUPPRESS  
FREQ SHIFT  
: 0  
FREQ/BEARING SET  
OTHERS...  
: 180  
S-SCAN SETTING menu  
3. Select TVG-NEAR with the trackball and press the [MENU] key to show the  
dialog box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
Numeric data entry dialog box  
4. Use the trackball to select S or T and press the [MENU] key to set. The  
setting range is –5 to 5. The higher the setting the greater the TVG effect.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Repeat steps 3-5 to set TVG-MEDIUM and TVG-FAR.  
When sea surface reflections or plankton layers disturb the picture, decrease  
appropriate TVG option by one or two steps.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
Note: When a fish school is located on a long-range setting (about 800 meters)  
and is approaching own ship do as follows:  
Adjust the tilt to keep the fish school in the center of the sonar beam, namely,  
fish school is displayed in strongest colors possible. Confirm that the fish echo  
is displayed in the same color as it approaches. If the color suddenly changes  
to weaker colors as the fish enters MEDIUM and NEAR areas, the TVG is  
improperly set. Adjust the TVG. If this again produces sea surface reflections  
and noise try to remove them with the AGC and noise limiter.  
If the above procedure does not produce satisfactory results, the TVG curve  
can be changed on the OTHERS sub menu in the H-SCAN SETTING menu.  
Also, adjust the setting of NEAR AGC, referring to next section.  
4.8  
Suppressing Bottom Tail  
4.8.1  
Adjust AGC  
The AGC functions to automatically reduce the receiver gain only against strong  
echoes such as the bottom or a large fish school. Since weak echoes remain  
unaffected, a small fish school becomes easier to detect. Adjust it so that the  
AGC works only on bottom reflections. Do not set it too high; weak echoes may  
be missed.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.8.2  
Decrease pulse length  
The pulse length determines the length of the transmission pulse emitted into the  
water. While a longer pulse is advantageous for long-range sounding, it has the  
disadvantage of being poor in discrimination of targets, that is, the ability to  
separate several closely located targets. When searching bottom fish, therefore,  
it is useful to shorten the pulse length in order to separate fish echoes from  
bottom reflections. Decrease the pulse length setting to shorten the pulse length.  
For search of surface and midwater fish in which bottom reflections are not so  
strong, use the longest pulse length “9”.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select TX PULSE LENGTH and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the longer the pulse length.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4.8.3  
Adjust 2nd AGC  
While it is ideal to suppress bottom echoes with the AGC alone there are some  
fishing grounds where this is not possible. (The high power sonar has the  
advantage of long-range detection but this can also be a disadvantage, since  
weaker echoes may be hidden in strong, unwanted echoes such as the bottom.)  
If you cannot suppress bottom echoes or sea surface reflections by the AGC  
function alone, use the 2nd AGC feature. Normally a setting of 1 or 2 is suitable.  
For especially strong echoes, use a setting of 3 or 4.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select 2nd AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-12. The higher the setting the greater the suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.8.4  
Adjust Near AGC  
When an excessively strong echo is received in shallow or heavily sedimented  
waters, you may not be able to suppress it by the TVG control alone. In this case,  
a fish school which is displayed at more than 300 m away may disappear  
gradually when the ship is approaching the fish school.  
Use the Near TVG feature to suppress this strong echo. Normally set it between  
3 and 4, however, this setting depends on the sea area. Do not set it too high; all  
echoes (including noise) from near distance may be painted in red.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select NEAR AGC and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-10. The higher the setting the greater the echo level of  
near distance.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.9  
Suppressing Bottom and Sea Surface  
Reflections in Shallow Waters  
In shallow fishing grounds with hard or rocky bottom, bottom reflections often  
interfere with wanted fish echoes and they can not be eliminated sufficiently with  
the aforementioned TVG and AGC functions, especially when the TILT is set to a  
larger angle in order to track fish schools approaching within 400 m. In such  
cases try to reduce the output power by adjusting the Tx output instead of  
turning down the gain. The picture becomes clearer when output power is  
reduced rather than when the GAIN is decreased as illustrated below.  
INCORRECT  
METHOD  
Fish echo  
Fish echo  
weakened  
TVG and AGC  
adjusted with  
TX POWER kept high  
CORRECT  
METHOD  
Fish echo  
Reduce TX POWER  
with GAIN kept  
constant  
How to suppress bottom and sea surface reflections in shallow waters  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select TX POWER and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the higher the Tx power.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.10 Rejecting Sonar Interference and Noise  
While observing the sonar picture, you may encounter occasional or intermittent  
noise and interference. These are mostly caused by on-board electronic  
equipment, engine or propeller noise, or electrical noise from other sonars being  
operated nearby.  
4.10.1 Identifying noise source  
To eliminate noise effectively, you should first identify the noise source as  
follows:  
1. Stop transmission on the TEST menu, by turning on “TX” in the TEST menu,  
and turn on the power of all on-board equipment one by one while observing  
the picture. If noise appears on the sonar display, that equipment is emitting  
noise. Check the offending equipment’s ground and installation.  
2. Run the boat at various speeds to check if the noise is speed dependent.  
If neither of the above two steps has effect on the picture, adjust one of the  
following:  
4.10.2 Interference rejector  
This control is similar to the interference rejector on echo sounders and radars. It  
is effective for rejecting random noise and sea surface reflections in rough sea  
conditions. Set it so that noise is just eliminated. Do not use an unnecessarily  
high setting since it may also reject small wanted echoes.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select INT REJECT and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
interference rejection.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.10.3 Changing Tx interval  
When other sonars nearby are operating the same transmission interval as that  
of own ship’s sonar, an interference ring appears on the display. To erase the  
interference ring from the screen, reduce the TX INTERVAL on the H-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
Interference  
Tx interval high  
Tx interval lowered  
How TX INTERVAL works  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select TX INTERVAL and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-9. The higher the setting the longer the Tx interval. The  
setting 0 is same as the setting 9.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
Note: When the sonar is used in shallow water with the range set between 60 m  
and 200 m and Tx cycle at “9”, bottom reflections caused by the 2nd-to-the-last  
transmission may appear on near ranges. Lower the Tx interval by 2 or 3 steps  
to suppress them.  
4.1.0.4 Shifting Tx frequency  
If interference cannot be suppressed by the interference rejector or Tx interval,  
shift the Tx frequency with FREQ SHIFT on the H-SCAN SETTING menu.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select FREQ SHIFT and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is -65 to +65.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.10.5 Noise limiter  
Weak, unwanted reflections, colored light-blue or green, appear when the water  
is dirty, plankton layers exists, or due to ship’s noise. The noise limiter can  
reduce the effects of these unwanted reflections. Raising the setting causes  
unwanted reflections to be displayed in colors of blue to background color.  
Normally a setting of 3 or 4 is sufficient.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select the S-SCAN SETTING menu and press the [MENU] key  
3. Select NOISE LIMITER and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Adjust setting from the dialog box as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
The setting range is 0-15. The higher the setting the greater the degree of  
suppression.  
5. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4.10.6 Echo average  
Adjusts echo afterglow, which can be useful for watching echo movement in the  
S-SCAN SETTING menu. The setting range is 0-7. The higher the number the  
longer echoes remain on the screen.  
4.10.7 Reverberation reduction  
You may choose the length of reverberation for the echo signal in the S-SCAN  
SETTING menu. The larger the value the shorter the reverberation, which  
makes it easer to see the echo signal. The setting range is 0-3.  
4.10.8 Suppressing gain of bottom echo  
None-moving echoes such as bottom echo, plankton echo, etc., may be  
suppressed by the setting of BOTTOM SUPPRESS in the H-SCAN SETTING  
menu (moving echoes such as fish school are not effected by this setting). The  
setting range is 0 to 10. The greater the setting, the greater the suppression  
level of the bottom, etc.  
Note: Too high a setting may suppress slow-moving fish school as well.  
4.10.9 Suppressing sidelobes  
Sidelobes are fairly emissions generated outside the main beam. The energy of  
the sidelobe is fairly weak but when the water is comparatively shallow and the  
bottom is rocky and hard, strong signals are detected by the sidelobe.  
To reduce the effect of sidelobes, adjust SIDELOBE SUPPRESS from the  
S-SCAN SETTING menu. The setting range is –3 to +3 and the default setting  
is 0. The higher the setting the greater the sidelobe suppression. If there is a  
difference between the port and starboard side images, use a minus setting.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.11 Adjusting Beamwidth  
The horizontal beamwidth of the Rx beam can be adjusted at the OTHERS  
menu as below to raise the horizontal resolution.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select S-SCAN SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
S-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
COLOR  
COLOR SETTING...  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE : COLOR CURVE 3  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
GAIN OFFSET  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
FAR TVG CURVE  
: 0  
: 0  
: TVG2  
ABSORPTION COEFF : 23.5dB  
TVG DISTANCE...  
2ND AGC DISTANCE : 0m  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: 200m  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG : 0  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR : 0  
GAIN CONTROL  
BEAMWIDTH...  
: NORMAL  
.OTHERS menu  
4. Select BEAMWIDTH and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog box.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
S-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
BEAMWIDTH  
BEAMWIDTH A : 0  
BEAMWIDTH B : 0  
Numeric data entry dialog box  
5. Select BEAMWIDTH A and set appropriate value. The higher the setting the  
sharper the horizontal resolution. The setting range is -4 to 5 plus AR and the  
default setting is 0. AR means AUTO RANGE and it automatically adjusts  
horizontal beamwidth according to the range.  
6. Select BEAMWIDTH B and set appropriate value. This controls echo beam  
width by echo processing. The setting range is 0-5, and the higher the setting  
the greater the horizontal resolution.  
7. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
8. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.12 Tracking a Fish School (target lock)  
The target lock function automatically tracks a fish school so you won’t lose sight  
of it on the display. Two types of target lock are available: position tracking  
(TARGET MARK) and fish school tracking (FISH) and you may select one from  
the menu as below. Default setting is “FISH.” However, if the FSV-84 cannot  
receive an echo of sufficient level of echo, tracking may not be performed.  
4.12.1 Selecting target lock type  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select INITITAL SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select YES and press the [MENU] key to confirm the CAUTION indicated.  
5. Select TARGET LOCK and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
TARGET LOCK  
TRACKING METHOD  
TILT INTERLOCK  
: FISH  
:
TILT&RANGE  
MARK INTERLOCK  
TRACKING DATA  
THRESHOLD  
:
ESTIMATE MARK  
: H&V  
: 16  
BOTTOM THRESHOLD  
TARGET SPEED LIMIT  
SMOOTHING  
: 3  
: 5kt  
: 0.5  
TARGET SPD UPDATE  
: 60SEC  
TARGET LOCK WINDOW : NORMAL  
DIMENSION SETUP  
VOLUME SETUP  
: 25t/1000m2  
: 25t/1000m3  
TARGET LOCK menu  
6. Select TRACKING METHOD and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog  
box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
TARGET MARK  
FISH  
Target lock type dialog box  
7. Use the trackball to select TARGET MARK or FISH as appropriate and press  
the [MENU] key.  
8. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
9. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to quit  
all menus.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.12.2 Fish school tracking mode  
The automatic echo target lock function automatically tracks the  
operator-selected fish school. When menu option TILT INTERLOCK on the  
TARGET LOCK menu (previous page) is set to TILT & RANGE, and the tracked  
fish school goes out of the zone in the range direction, the range and tilt are  
automatically controlled according to the fish school position.  
1. Select FISH at step 7 in the procedure in section 4.12.1.  
2. Use the trackball to select the fish school to track on the slant display.  
3. Press the [TARGET LOCK] key.  
The target lock mark appears ( ) on the fish school with a vector extending  
from its edge. This vector shows estimated target position after elapsed of  
preset vector time. The target lock mark is also inscribed on the vertical  
display, however no vector appears.  
If the target is lost, the target lock mark changes to red color and the  
tracking mode changes to position mode (see next section) at that  
position.  
When the FSV-84 detects and tracks the target again, the mode returns to  
the fish school mode.  
4. To turn off the target lock, press the [TARGET LOCK] key again.  
Vector*  
Target lock mark  
Bearing mark  
follows target  
Fish school's track*  
when target  
lock is active.  
* Turned on or off  
from MARK DISPLAY  
TARGET LOCK DATA  
menu.)  
2975m (Horizontal range)  
153m (Depth)  
S
C
12.3kt (Speed)  
256° (Course)  
Target lock mark and target lock data  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.12.3 Position tracking mode  
This mode tracks a stationary position (such as a reef) using position data fed  
from a navigator.  
A
B
C
D
Depth  
E
How position tracking mode target lock works  
1. Select TARGET MARK at step 7 in the procedure in section 4.12.1.  
2. Use the trackball to select the location to track.  
3. Press the [TARGET LOCK] key to inscribe the target lock mark ( ) at the  
location selected. The target lock mark is also inscribed on the vertical  
display.  
Tilt, range and vertical bearing are automatically adjusted to track the location.  
Using the figure above as an example, the target lock mark is placed on location  
“E”. Then, the equipment remembers the location of “E” and automatically  
changes the tilt angle as the ship moves from position A through D. As long as  
the fish school “E” is stationary its echo is kept displayed on the screen.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.12.4 TARGET LOCK menu  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
TARGET LOCK  
TRACKING METHOD  
TILT INTERLOCK  
: FISH  
:
TILT&RANGE  
MARK INTERLOCK  
TRACKING DATA  
THRESHOLD  
:
ESTIMATE MARK  
: H&V  
: 16  
BOTTOM THRESHOLD  
TARGET SPEED LIMIT  
SMOOTHING  
: 3  
: 5kt  
: 0.5  
TARGET SPD UPDATE  
: 60SEC  
TARGET LOCK WINDOW : NORMAL  
DIMENSION SETUP  
VOLUME SETUP  
: 25t/1000m2  
: 25t/1000m3  
TARGET LOCK menu  
TRACKING METHOD: Selects tracking method, target mark (position) or fish.  
TILT INTERLOCK: Provides automatic change of tilt angle and range or tilt  
angle during target lock.  
MARK INTERLOCK: Selects items of numeric/graphic data display during target  
lock operation.  
TRACKING DATA: Selects which tracking data to use; horizontal, or both  
horizontal and vertical.  
THRESHOLD: Selects the weakest echo color number to track. The setting  
range is 1 to 30.  
BOTTOM THRESHOLD: When a target is judged as a bottom echo, raise this  
setting to differentiate bottom from target. The setting range is 0 to 5.  
TARGET SPEED LIMIT: Sets maximum fish speed to track. The setting range is  
1kt to 15kt.  
SMOOTHING: Sets smoothing rate for fish speed data. The setting range is 0.0  
to 1.0.  
TARGET SPD UPDATE: Sets fish speed data update interval among 15, 30, 45  
and 60 seconds.  
TARGET LOCK WINDOW: Selects size of target lock detection area; normal,  
large, largest. However, this area is not displayed on the screen.  
DIMENSION SETUP: Sets dimension constant for calculation of fish school  
tonnage from the fish school dimension.  
VOLUME SETUP: Sets volume constant for calculation fish school tonnage from  
fish school volume.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.13 Detecting Fish Schools Aurally  
Sometimes you may be preoccupied with other tasks and unable to concentrate  
on watching the sonar picture. In such cases it would be a good choice to use  
the audio function. This function enables you to monitor echoes from fish  
schools and seabed through the built-in speaker.  
After you’ve become accustomed to monitoring fish aurally, you should be able  
to detect a fish school from a range longer than you can detect it on the screen.  
In addition you may judge whether the fish school is approaching or going away;  
the tone becomes higher when the school is approaching and lowers when the  
school is going away.  
4.13.1 Selecting direction  
In the default setting, the audio function is on and the audio sector is 30°.  
1. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the direction you want to  
monitor through the speaker.  
2. Press the [R/B AUDIO] key.  
The audio bearing mark appears on the bearing selected, in a 30°, 60°, 90°,  
180° or 330° sector centering the audio bearing mark. Echoes are monitored  
through the speaker. You can adjust speaker volume with the [AUDIO] control.  
Note: When the trackball mark is placed near own ship mark and the [R/B  
AUDIO] key is pressed, the range mark and the related data at the bottom of the  
screen are erased. Note that the audio bearing is erased when “AUDIO” on the  
ALARM & AUDIO menu is turned off.  
A
Audio bearing mark  
Range mark  
R 400m  
B 45°  
Range and audio bearing  
marks data  
Range and audio bearing marks  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.13.2 Selecting audio sector  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ALARM & AUDIO and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ALARM & AUDIO  
FISH ALARM  
: OFF  
ALARM LEVEL  
ALARM ZONE...  
SHIP SPEED ALARM  
AUDIO  
: 16  
: ON  
: ON  
: 30°  
: 0  
AUDIO SECTOR  
REVERBERATION  
ALARM & AUDIO menu  
4. Select AUDIO SECTOR and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
30°  
60°  
90°  
180°  
330°  
Audio sector dialog box  
5. Select desired audio sector among 30°, 60°, 90°, 180°, 330° and press the  
[MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4.13.3 Reverberation  
You may choose the length of reverberation for the audio signal. The larger the  
value the longer the reverberation, which makes it easer to hear the audio signal.  
The setting range is 0-9 and the default setting is 0.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.14 Offcenter  
4.14.1 Manual offcenter  
The manual offcenter feature is useful for relocating fish school on the display.  
1. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the position where you  
want to relocate the own ship mark.  
2. Press the [OFF CENTER] key.  
3. To move the own ship mark back to the screen center, press the [OFF  
CENTER] key again.  
Fish school  
Fish  
school  
Press [OFF CENTER] key  
Own ship  
mark  
Own ship mark  
moves to trackball  
mark position.  
Set trackball  
mark here,  
for example.  
How to use offcenter  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.14.2 Automatic offcenter  
The slant mode display in the slant mode combination display (portrait or  
landscape) can be automatically off centered when the train is changed while  
using auto train or target lock or the user changes the train angle manually. This  
is useful to maintain effective range ratio at 1.0.  
To activate this feature it is necessary to activate automatic offcenter from the  
menu.  
Train angle  
Train angle  
* Numeric/graphic  
display area  
*
*
PORTRAIT  
format  
Own position  
H disp.  
H disp.  
S disp.  
S disp.  
Case 1: "Train"<RO  
Case 2: "Train">RO  
*
*
H disp.  
H disp.  
LANDSCAPE  
format  
S disp.  
Train angle  
Train angle  
Own position  
Own position  
S disp.  
Case 1: "Train"<RO  
Case 2: "Train">RO  
Train angle: Angle in automatic training, set with the ]V1/S] or [V2] key.  
R0: Train angle (30°, 45°, 60°) set on menu.  
Automatic offcentering is available regardless whether the train angle setting  
value is the same or larger than actual train angle.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select S AUTO OFF CENTER and press the [MENU] key.  
The S AUTO OFF CENTER is only operative when the slant combination  
display is active in vertical or horizontal split.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
OFF  
30°  
45°  
60°  
5. Choose value desired and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT from the top of the menu and press the [MENU] key.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.15 Fish Alarm  
The fish alarm sounds the aural alarm when a fish echo above a preset strength  
enters the operator-set alarm zone.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ALARM & AUDIO and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ALARM & AUDIO  
FISH ALARM  
: OFF  
ALARM LEVEL  
ALARM ZONE...  
SHIP SPEED ALARM  
AUDIO  
: 16  
: ON  
: ON  
: 30°  
: 0  
AUDIO SECTOR  
REVERBERATION  
ALARM & AUDIO menu  
4. Select FISH ALARM and press the [MENU] key to open the dialog box.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
OFF  
ON  
Fish alarm status dialog box  
5. Select ON, select QUIT and then press the [MENU] key. To cancel the fish  
alarm, select OFF instead of ON.  
6. Select ALARM ZONE and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on the starting point of the  
alarm zone.  
8. Press the [MENU] key.  
9. Rotate the trackball clockwise to select the ending point. The display paints a  
fan-shaped alarm zone.  
10.Press the [MENU] key.  
11. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
<<ALARM ZONE SETTING>>  
PLACE CURSOR AT STARTING POINT  
AND PRESS MENU KEY TO SET.  
PRESS R/B KEY TO CANCEL.  
<<ALARM ZONE SETTING>>  
PLACE CURSOR AT ENDING POINT  
AND PRESS MENU KEY TO  
COMPLETE ALARM ZONE SETTING.  
How to set the fish alarm zone  
Note 1: There must be at least three degrees difference between the starting  
and ending points to get a fan-shaped alarm zone as shown in (a) and (b) below.  
Otherwise, the unit paints a 360-degree alarm zone as in (c) where there is less  
than 3 degrees between the starting and ending points and (d) where the  
bearing marker has been rotated one full turn.  
More than 3˚  
Within 3˚  
(a)  
(b)  
(c)  
(d)  
How to create desired alarm zone  
Note 2: The echo strength which triggers the alarm can be set with ALARM  
LEVEL on the ALARM & AUDIO menu. The setting range is 0-30.  
This value corresponds with the number of 32-echo colors.  
Note 3: To disable the fish alarm, choose OFF at step 5 in the procedure on the  
previous page.  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.16 Comparing Fish School Concentration  
You can get an estimate of the volume of two fish schools by using the two  
ESTIMATE keys as follows:  
1. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on a fish school, and then  
press the [ESTIMATE 1] key.  
2. The estimate mark appears on the fish school. Relative volume is shown by a  
figure between 0 and 100, below the estimate mark. When the area inside  
the mark is filled in reddish brown, volume figure is said to be “100”.  
3. Operate the trackball to place the trackball mark on another fish school and  
press the [ESTIMATE 2] key.  
4. Compare estimate figures for each fish school by observing estimate mark  
data and the fish histogram.  
5. To turn off the estimate marks press their respective keys.  
Estimate mark 2  
North mark  
NUMERIC/  
GRAPHIC  
DATA  
Estimate mark 1  
E
DISPLAY  
Estimate mark 2 data  
Estimate mark 1 data  
Estimate marks and their data  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.17 Measuring Fish School Speed  
To ensure a good haul, it is important to estimate the direction and speed of the  
fish school before shooting the net. You can do this with the [FISH] key. With  
tidal current data plus fish speed data, you can determine the timing of the net  
shooting more efficiently. This function requires speed and heading data.  
4.17.1 Entering fish marks  
1. Place the trackball mark on the center of a fish school, and then press the  
[FISH] key. The latest fish mark ( ) appears on the fish school.  
2. Wait 1 to 2 minutes.  
3. Place the trackball mark on the same fish school selected in step 1 and press  
the [FISH] key. The latest fish mark appears on the target, the 2nd latest fish  
mark ( ) appears on the location selected at step 1 and any earlier fish  
marks are shown with an “X”. The distance between the two fish marks and  
fish school course and speed appear at the bottom right-hand corner of the  
horizontal display area.  
Earlier fish mark (max. 8)  
2nd latest fish mark  
Latest  
fish mark  
Latest fish  
mark  
WAIT 1-2  
MINUTES  
X
FISH MOVEMENT DATA  
(Distance moved)  
Place trackball mark  
on fish school's current  
location and press  
[FISH] key again.  
(Horizontal range to fish mark)  
2975m  
Place trackball mark  
on a fish school and  
press [FISH] key.  
153m (Depth)  
S 12.3kt (Speed)  
C
256° (Course)  
How to measure fish school speed  
Note 1: Fish movement is calculated using ship’s speed and heading data.  
Accordingly, pitching and rolling may affect the calculation. For best results, try  
the procedure two or three times to verify reliability.  
Note 2: The time and distance between pressings of the [FISH] key should be  
as long as possible to increase accuracy of measurement. For best results,  
repeat the procedure two or three times.  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
Note 3: Each time the [FISH] key is pressed the latest fish mark and ship’s  
speed mark change in the sequence shown below.  
This data is the latest fish  
mark data.  
[FISH] key pressed once  
twice  
three times  
four times  
Fish mark  
4.17.2 Deleting fish marks  
Fish marks can be deleted individually with the [DELETE MARK] key or by  
earliest entry through the menu. Note that the [DELETE MARK] key also erases  
event marks.  
Deleting fish marks with the [DELETE MARK] key  
Use the trackball to place the trackball mark on the fish mark you want to erase.  
The color of the fish mark changes from white to red when the fish mark is  
correctly selected. Press the [DELETE MARK] key to delete the fish mark.  
Deleting fish marks through the menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ERASE MARKS and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ERASE MARKS  
EVENT MARK  
FISH MARK  
OWN SHIP POS MARK: DELETE  
SHIP'S TRACK : DELETE  
: DELETE  
: DELETE  
ERASE MARKS menu  
4. Select FISH MARK and press the [MENU] key. Each press of the [MENU]  
key deletes the earliest fish mark.  
5. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.18 Event Mark, Own Ship Position Mark  
The event mark is useful for finding the horizontal range, depth and bearing to a  
location some distance from current position. 10 such marks may be inscribed  
on the horizontal display. This function requires speed and heading data.  
There are two types of event marks, latest event mark () and event mark (+).  
Each time an event mark is entered the latest event mark appears at the  
trackball mark position and all other event marks are shown by the “plus” (+)  
mark and numbered in sequential order. When the memory capacity for event  
marks is reached the earliest event mark is automatically erased to make room  
for the latest.  
The own ship position mark ( ) is used to mark current position.  
4.18.1 Entering an event mark  
1. Set the trackball mark where you want to place an event mark.  
2. Press the [EVENT] key. The horizontal range, depth and bearing to the event  
mark appear at the bottom left corner of the horizontal display area.  
234: Horizontal range (m) from own ship mark  
19: Present depth (m) to mark  
(35): Depth (m) of mark at moment EVENT key is pressed.  
B265: Present bearing (degree)  
Bottom left-hand corner of the screen  
Event mark data  
With speed and heading data the mark follows own ship’s movements. In the  
True Motion mode, the event mark is stationary. When the tilt angle is changed  
mark position changes with slant range. Note however that the mark’s position  
does not change when automatic tilt is active; the tilt center angle is used to  
position the mark.  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
Plotting an event mark on the display is equivalent to dropping a buoy with an  
anchoring chain that extends from surface to bottom. The buoy is fixed at its  
geographical location, but the marker on the display moves to a point where  
present beam plane intersects the anchor chain of the buoy as ship moves or  
the tilt angle is changed. This can be said about marks as well such as fish mark  
and trackball mark.  
(35)  
Stored when  
EVENT key is  
pressed.  
B
You observe picture from  
direction of mark.  
A
Event mark description  
4.18.2 Entering an own ship position mark  
Place the trackball mark close to the center of the own ship mark and press the  
[EVENT] key. Ten own ship position marks may be inscribed. When the capacity  
for own ship position marks is reached the earliest own ship position mark is  
automatically erased.  
4.18.3 Deleting an event mark, own ship position mark  
Event marks and own ship position marks can be deleted individually with the  
[DELETE MARK] key or by earliest entry through the menu.  
Deleting event marks, own ship position mark with the [DELETE MARK] key  
Use the trackball to place the trackball mark on the event mark or own ship  
position mark you want to erase. The color of the mark changes from white to  
red when the mark is correctly selected. Press the [DELETE MARK] key to  
delete the mark.  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
Deleting event marks, own ship position mark through the menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ERASE MARKS and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ERASE MARKS  
EVENT MARK  
FISH MARK  
OWN SHIP POS MARK: DELETE  
SHIP'S TRACK : DELETE  
: DELETE  
: DELETE  
ERASE MARKS menu  
4. Select EVENT MARK (or OWN SHIP POS MARK) and press the [MENU] key.  
Each pressing deletes the earliest event mark (or own ship position mark).  
5. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to quit  
all menus.  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.19 Net Course Mark  
Before shooting the net, decide the shoot timing considering tide direction,  
distance to the fish school and moving direction of the fish school. Use the net  
course mark as a guide to decide the timing. This function requires speed and  
heading data.  
Inscribing the net course mark  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key to open the OTHERS menu.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key to open the DISPLAY  
SETTING menu.  
4. Select NET COURSE MARK and press the [MENU] key. Instructions for  
setting the net course mark appear on the display.  
Net course mark  
<<NET SHOOT SETTING>>  
PLACE NET SHOOT CIRCLE BY  
TRACKBALL AND PRESS MENU KEY TO SET.  
PRESS R/B KEY TO CANCEL.  
Net course mark  
5. Use the trackball to position the net course mark, which is shown by a  
dashed circle.  
6. Press the [MENU] key to set, and the dashed circle changes to a solid one.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to quit  
all menus.  
* To delete the net course mark, repeat the above procedure.  
4-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.20 Observing Net Behavior  
With net sonde connection you can observe net behavior after the throwing of  
the net. Accurate depiction of net sonde position depends on proper setting of  
the distances between net sonde transmitters. You can set those distances on  
the OTHERS - INITIAL SETTING - NET SONDE SETTNG menu.  
This function requires speed and heading data.  
1. Press the [SHOOT] key just upon throwing the net into the water. The  
following actions occur:  
Net shoot mark ( ) appears at own ship position.  
Net shoot data appears.  
Net sonde mark is inscribed.  
Net depth data is displayed.  
Water depth data and water temperature data erased from own ship’s  
track.  
In an ES combination mode, tide data and net depth replace the water  
temperature graph.  
In an ES combination mode, the picture advance method changes to  
“speed sync.”  
In an ES combination mode, the picture advance width appears on the ES  
display.  
2. To erase the net sonde mark and associated data, press the [SHOOT] key  
again.  
NET SHOOT DATA  
Distance run from shooting of net  
Time elapsed from shooting of net  
N-UP S  
202m  
193m  
59m  
0.53NM  
5:32  
R
300m  
NUMERIC  
DATA  
AUTO  
T 17˚  
(21˚)  
B
296˚  
10  
8
G
P
DISPLAY  
NET DEPTH  
S1 134m  
S2 178m  
S3 213m  
Net shoot mark  
Net depth data  
Net sonde mark  
Net behavior  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.21 OTHERS Menu  
This section presents an overview of the OTHERS menu on the H-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
4.21.1 Displaying the OTHERS menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select S-SCAN SETTING and press the [MENU] key to open the H-SCAN  
SETTING menu.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key to show the OTHERS menu.  
MENU  
S-SCAN SETTING  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
COLOR  
COLOR SETTING...  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE : COLOR CURVE 3  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
GAIN OFFSET  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
FAR TVG CURVE  
: 0  
: 0  
: TVG2  
ABSORPTION COEFF : 23.5dB  
TVG DISTANCE...  
2ND AGC DISTANCE : 0m  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: 200m  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG : 0  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR : 0  
GAIN CONTROL  
BEAMWIDTH...  
: NORMAL  
OTHERS sub menu  
4-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.21.2 OTHERS menu description  
COLOR: Select color arrangement to use. The default setting is COLOR 1.  
COLOR SETTING…: Customizes colors.  
1. Select COLOR SETTING from the OTHERS menu and press the [MENU]  
key. The following display appears.  
2. Use the trackball to select color to change and press the [MENU] key.  
Choose to register setting  
and close menu.  
H-SCAN COLOR 1  
QUIT  
Choose to cancel change.  
CANCEL  
Choose to restore  
default colors.  
DEFAULT  
QUIT  
Choose to quit.  
COL  
22  
HUE  
27  
SAT  
84  
LUM  
53  
CANCEL  
Choose to cancel.  
COL: Adjust color (Setting range: 0-100(%)).  
HUE: Adjusts color tint (Setting range: 0-100(%)).  
SAT (Saturation): Adjusts color vividness  
(Setting range: 0-100(%)).  
LUM (Luminescence): Adjusts color brightness  
(Setting range: 0-100(%)).  
COLOR SETTING menu  
3. Select S or T of item COL, HUE, SAT or LUM.  
4. Press the [MENU] key to change the setting.  
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change level of other items.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Repeat steps 2-6 to change other colors.  
8. Select QUIT at the top of the menu and press the [MENU] key  
9. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
finish.  
Note: If you get lost in operation and want to return to default colors, select  
DEFAULT and press the [MENU] key.  
COLOR RESPONSE: Color response defines reflected echo strength versus  
color level conversion. You can select one of four color response tables, and the  
default setting is COLOR RESPONSE 3.  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
COLOR RESPONSE…: Adjusts reflected echo strength versus echo color level  
for currently selected color response number.  
To adjust the curve, place the trackball at the point desired and press the  
[MENU] key. On the horizontal axis input level relative value is shown in the  
range from 0 to 100%. The setting range for input level is 0-100% in increments  
of 10% and output level is 0-100% in any value.  
To set input level versus output level, use the trackball to  
place the trackball mark on location desired and press the  
[MENU] key.  
DEFAULT CANCEL QUIT  
S-SCAN COLOR  
100  
DEFAULT: Select to restore default  
setting for selected color response.  
CANCEL: Select to cancel change.  
QUIT: Select to finish.  
80  
60  
40  
20  
Currently selected color  
Input level scale  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Color response curve  
GAIN OFFSET: Adjusts gain level. If the front panel [GAIN] control does not  
provide satisfactory gain adjustment, enter an offset here. The setting range is  
0-12.  
SIGNAL LEVEL: Dirty water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the  
screen in green or light-blue. These echoes may be erased in order of strength.  
The setting range is 0-15.  
FAR TVG CURVE: Selects the TVG curve to use. The setting range is  
TVG1-TVG4. The higher the setting the sharper the gain curve.  
ABSORPTION COEFF: Attenuation of the acoustic pulse underwater varies with  
sea area and water temperature. This menu item is provided to offset absorption,  
however the default setting is suitable in most cases. If sensitivity decreases with  
distance, increase the absorption coefficient setting. And if it increases with  
distance decrease this setting.  
4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
TVG DISTANCE: Sets the TVG effective distance for near, medium and far  
ranges.  
Setting range  
NEAR: 50-150 m, 10 m increments  
MED: 300-500 m, 20 m increments  
FAR: 600-1000 m, 40 m increments  
To adjust a TVG curve, select S or T of item desired and press the [MENU] key  
to change the setting.  
Select to register  
setting and finish.  
QUIT  
NEAR  
100  
MED  
400  
FAR  
800  
Select to cancel  
change.  
CANCEL  
Select item with trackball  
and press [MENU] key to  
change setting.  
TVG setting window  
2ND AGC DISTANCE: Sets starting distance that 2nd AGC functions. The setting  
range is 0 to 2000 m, in increments of 20 m. Setting is invalid if display range is  
lower than this setting.  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE: Sets Near AGC effective distance. Set the range  
between 20 m and 300 m, in increments of 20 m.  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG: Selects echo smoothing level in the range direction. The  
setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the smoothing.  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR: Selects echo smoothing level in circular direction. The  
setting range is 0-3. The higher the setting the greater the smoothing.  
GAIN CONTROL: If sensitivity is low even with maximum gain, change the  
setting to WIDE. This doubles the control range.  
BEAMWIDTH: Adjusts horizontal beamwidth. For further details see “4.11  
Adjusting Beamwidth”.  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.22 Interpreting the Slant Display  
4.22.1 Bottom echoes  
When the tilt angle is set at 90 degrees with the sector center faced dead ahead,  
the pictures illustrated below will appear on the screen. The bottom echo is  
represented on the screen as a thick line which realistically shows the bottom  
contour. When the tilt angle is decreased, the bottom trace becomes wider and  
weaker. By observing bottom condition on the screen, you may prevent the net  
from being damaged by a reef or a shipwreck.  
Bottom  
Bottom  
Bottom  
Bottom echoes  
4-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.22.2 Fish schools  
A fish school appears as a mass of echoes on the screen. The color of the mass  
shows the density of the fishes and the size of the mass how they are distributed.  
In the following figures, the same fish school is observed with two different tilt  
angles. From the left figure, the operator can know the horizontal distribution of  
the fish school, and from the right figure the vertical distribution.  
Surface fish school  
Bottom  
Bottom fish school  
Bottom  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.22.3 Sea surface reflections  
As ultrasonic pulses at both edges of the 180° sector beam are always emitted  
horizontally along the sea surface regardless of the tilt angle setting, sea surface  
reflections appear as a thick line extending across the own ship mark. When the  
sonar is used with a narrow tilt angle, the sea surface reflections cover an  
extended area as illustrated below.  
4.22.4 Wake  
A wake produced by own ship or another ship can be a strong reflecting object  
when a narrow tilt angle is used. As the wake appears as a thick continuous line,  
it can be easily distinguished from a fish school. A wake contains many air  
bubbles which attenuate ultrasonic energy, making it difficult to sound beyond  
the wake.  
4-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
4.22.5 False echo by sidelobe  
An ultrasonic wave is emitted only in the direction set by the TILT lever, however  
there are some emissions outside the main beam. These are called sidelobes.  
The energy of the sidelobe is fairly weak but when the water is comparatively  
shallow and the bottom is rocky and hard, strong signals are detected by the  
sidelobe. These are represented on the display as a false echo as shown below.  
Bottom  
4.22.6 Noise and interference  
Interference from a sonar on another ship appears on the screen as shown in  
(A). (B) shows Interference from electrical equipment on board own ship. Noise  
from marine life appears on the display as shown in (C).  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. SLANT MODE  
This page intentionally left blank.  
4-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
The echo sounder picture is available with connection of an echo sounder.  
5.1  
Basic Operating Procedure  
4. Select appropriate echosounder mode.  
2. Lower transducer.  
: Mid protrusion  
: Full protrusion  
3. Adjust display brilliance.  
1. Turn on power.  
FSV-84  
V1/S  
HSV  
5. Adjust range, gain and  
picture advance speed on  
the ES1 SETTING (or  
ES2 SETTING) menu.  
Control unit  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.2  
Typical Echo Sounder Displays  
5.2.1  
Echo sounder 1 display  
This display shows the picture from an echo sounder on the right-hand side of  
the display.  
Trackball mark position reference mark (See below.)  
Color bar  
N
Transmission line  
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
Speed sync  
advance width data*  
0
Distance from own  
800  
1800m  
ship to trackball mark  
26  
30  
Depth of trackball mark  
Trackball mark  
2
Range scale  
60  
S
* Shows horizontal display width  
(in meters). Appears when picture advance  
speed is synchronized with ship  
speed.  
Bottom  
Fish echo  
Fish estimate mark no. and beginning and  
ending depths (dashed lines) of estimate  
mark calculation  
Indications and markers on the echo sounder 1 display  
Trackball mark position reference mark  
The trackball mark position reference mark, a solid circle, is inscribed on the  
ship’s track when the trackball mark is placed in the echo sounder display. Its  
purpose is to show corresponding trackball mark position on the horizontal  
display. It changes position with trackball mark position and tilt range, and  
disappears when its position is no longer within the range of the echo sounder  
display. This mark does not appear when the distance to the trackball mark is  
longer than the track length. Own ship’s speed data is required for this function.  
Trackball mark  
Track  
position reference  
mark  
a
Trackball mark  
Trackball mark position reference mark  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.2.2  
Echo sounder 2 (net recorder or echo sounder) display  
With net recorder connection, the echo sounder 2 display can show the picture  
from the net recorder. (The picture from an echo sounder may also be shown.)  
You may show the net recorder’s downward-looking picture.  
Downward-looking net recorder display  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
Transmission  
line  
0
10  
20  
30  
S
Ground rope  
Indications and markers on the echo sounder 2 display  
(shown: downward looking display)  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.2.3  
Echo sounder combination mode (ES1 + ES2)  
This display shows the picture from the echo sounder and the net recorder. Also  
two echo sounder pictures can be displayed, or upward and downward looking  
display of the net recorder can be displayed.  
Echo sounder + net recorder display  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
0
60  
Echo Sounder  
Display (ES1)  
120  
0
Net Recorder  
Display (ES2)  
30  
60  
S
Horizontal Display  
Echo sounder combination display  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
Upward + downward looking net recorder display (ES2 mode)  
The marks and indications which appear on the downward looking display are  
also common to the upward + downward looking display.  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
60  
Upward  
30  
Looking  
Picture  
0
0
Downward  
Looking  
Picture  
30  
60  
S
Ground rope  
Echo Sounder 2 display (Upward + downward looking display)  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.3 Selecting an Echo Sounder Mode  
An echo sounder mode may be selected with the [MODE] key, however no echo  
sounder mode is available in the default setting. To enable selection of an echo  
sounder mode with the [MODE] key, follow the procedure below.  
Enabling an echo sounder mode  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
DISPLAY SETTING  
DISPLAY MODE...  
MODE SELECTION  
TX/RX MODE  
: MODE KEY  
: ALTERNATIVE  
: LANDSCAPE  
H2/S DISPLAY  
PRESENTATION MODE : HEAD UP  
TM DISPLAY RANGE  
BEARING REF  
TILT LEVER  
: 1.6R  
: SHIP HEADING  
: TILT  
S AUTO OFF CENTER : OFF  
H-SLICE WIDTH  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC  
NET COURSE MARK  
MANUAL DEGAUSS  
AUTO DEGAUSS  
DIMMER  
: 16  
: KP SYNC  
: ENTER  
: EXECUTE  
: INT SENSOR  
: 10  
KEY BEEP VOLUME  
: 5  
DISPLAY SETTING menu  
4. Select DISPLAY MODE and press the [MENU] key to show the display mode  
dialog box.  
H1  
H1&H2  
V1  
V1&V2  
V1&ES1  
V1&ES2  
HISTORY  
ES1  
ES2  
ES1&ES2  
Display mode dialog box  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5. Select desired ES modes (you may select as many modes as you wish)  
referring to the illustration below and press the [MENU] key. The check marks  
in the dialog box denote active modes.  
ES1: Echo sounder picture  
ES2: Net recorder picture (or echo sounder picture)  
Depending on the menu setting, the screen combination can be shown as  
follows.  
System menu setting and available displays  
ES2 on the  
SYSTEM menu*  
NET RECORDER  
DISP** on ES2  
SETTING menu  
Sample  
ES  
NR  
None  
1)  
2)  
3)  
NR down  
NR up, NR down  
* = For details about the SYSTEM menu, contact your dealer or refer to the  
installation manual.  
** = When NET RECORDING DISP is set for UP/DOWN, the ES1 picture  
changes from the echo sounder picture to the downward looking net  
recorder picture.  
ES1  
1) ES1  
V1  
2) ES1  
3) NR up  
1) ES1  
2) ES1  
ES1 + V1  
3) NR up  
1) ES2  
1) ES1  
2) NR down  
3) NR down  
2) ES1  
3) NR up  
1) ES2  
2) NR down  
3) NR down  
1) ES2  
2) NR down  
3) NR down  
V1  
ES1  
ES2  
ES2  
ES2 + V1  
ES: Echo sounder picture  
NR up: Net Recorder upward picture  
NR down: Net Recorder downward picture  
V1: Vertical mode picture  
Echo sounder mode configurations and menu setting  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.4  
Selecting Display Range  
The basic range and range shifting functions together give you the means to  
select the depth you can see on the screen. The basic range can be thought of  
as providing a “window” into the water column and range shifting as moving the  
“window” to the desired depth.  
Note: Set the range and shift so they are the same as those set on the echo  
sounder. This setting does not affect the original echo sounder setting.  
Shift  
Display  
Range and display shift concept  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ES1 SETTING (or ES2 SETTING) and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ES2 SETTING  
ES1 SETTING  
GAIN  
: 5  
GAIN  
: 5  
RANGE BELOW NET  
RANGE UPPER NET  
CLUTTER  
: 160 m  
: 160 m  
: 0  
RANGE  
: 160 m  
: 0 m  
: 0  
SHIFT  
CLUTTER  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
INT REJECT  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
: 0  
: 0  
INT REJECT  
: OFF  
: 1/1  
: OFF  
PICTURE ADVANCE  
COLOR SETTING...  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
PICTURE ADVANCE : 1/1  
PICT ADVC AT SHOOT : SPEED SYNC  
COLOR SETTING...  
NET RECORDER DISP : UP/DOWN  
NET RECORDER RANGE : 80 m  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
SCALE POSITION  
: RIGHT  
ES1 SETTING menu  
ES2 SETTING menu  
(net recorder connected)  
ES1 SETTING, ES2 SETTING menus  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
4. Select RANGE (or RANGE UPPER NET, RANGE BELOW NET in case of  
net recorder on the ES2) and press the [MENU] key.  
QUIT  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
CANCEL  
20m  
40m  
20m  
40m  
60m  
60m  
80m  
80m  
120m  
160m  
240m  
320m  
120m  
160m  
240m  
320m  
INTERLOCK  
RANGE menu  
(ES1 SETTING menu)  
RANGE menu  
(ES2 SETTING menu)  
Range dialog box  
5. Use the trackball to select range desired and press the [MENU] key.  
(INTERLOCK in the range dialog box for the ES2 SETTING menu uses the  
same range as set for ES1. It is effective when the ES2 display is in use.)  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select SHIFT in case of echo sounder ES1 and press the [MENU] key.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
Dialog box for setting numeric data  
8. Use the trackball to select or and press the [MENU] key to select shift  
desired. The shift range is 0-1000 m.  
9. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
10.Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close the menu.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.5  
Adjusting the Gain  
You may adjust the display level of the echo sounder picture as below; the gain  
of the echo sounder itself cannot be adjusted from the sonar.  
Note: Set the range and shift so they are the same as those set on the echo  
sounder. This setting does not affect the original echo sounder setting.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ES1 SETTING (or ES2 SETTING) and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ES2 SETTING  
ES1 SETTING  
GAIN  
: 5  
GAIN  
: 5  
RANGE BELOW NET  
RANGE UPPER NET  
CLUTTER  
: 160 m  
: 160 m  
: 0  
RANGE  
: 160 m  
: 0 m  
: 0  
SHIFT  
CLUTTER  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
INT REJECT  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
: 0  
: 0  
INT REJECT  
: OFF  
: 1/1  
: OFF  
PICTURE ADVANCE  
COLOR SETTING...  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
PICTURE ADVANCE : 1/1  
PICT ADVC AT SHOOT : SPEED SYNC  
COLOR SETTING...  
NET RECORDER DISP : UP/DOWN  
NET RECORDER RANGE : 80 m  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
SCALE POSITION  
: RIGHT  
ES1 SETTING menu  
ES2 SETTING menu  
(net recorder connected)  
ES1 SETTING and ES2 SETTING menus  
4. Select GAIN and press the [MENU] key.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
Dialog box for setting numeric data  
5. Use the trackball to select or and press the [MENU] key to select gain  
desired. The setting range is 0-10. The higher the setting the greater the  
gain.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close the menu.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.6  
Picture Advance Speed  
The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run  
across the screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a  
fast advance speed will expand a fish school horizontally and a slow advance  
speed will contract it.  
Note: Set the picture advance speed to the same setting as on the echo sounder  
connected. This setting does not affect the original echo sounder setting.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ES1 SETTING (or ES2 SETTING) and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select PICTURE ADVANCE and press the [MENU] key.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
1/1  
1/2  
1/4  
1/8  
SPEED SYNC  
Picture advance speed dialog box  
5. Use the trackball to select advance speed desired and press the [MENU] key.  
The fractions in the dialog box are one line produced per number of  
transmissions. For example, 1/2, displays one scan line per two  
transmissions. SPEED SYNC advances the picture according to ship’s speed.  
This mode is advantageous for judging fish school size and abundance since  
fish schools will be shown at their actual sizes regardless of ship’s speed.  
Note: When using “SPEED SYNC,” and the echo sounder signal becomes  
lost, the picture shown at the time the signal was lost is copied and  
continuously replayed on the screen until the echo sounder signal is  
restored.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close the menu.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.7 Measuring Depth, Distance  
You can measure depth and distance (picture advance set for “speed sync”)  
from own ship to a location with the trackball mark. Use the trackball to place the  
trackball mark on the location. The trackball mark shows depth on its horizontal  
axis and distance on its vertical axis.  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
0
800  
Distance from own  
ship to mark  
1800m  
25  
40  
Depth  
Trackball  
mark  
Range  
scale  
80  
S
How to measure depth and distance on the echo sounder display  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.8 Comparing Fish School Concentration  
You can get an estimate of the volume of two fish schools by using the two  
ESTIMATE keys as below. You may use these keys in the ES1 and ES2 modes.  
1. Use the trackball to set the trackball mark at the center of fish school and  
press the [ESTIMATE 1] or [ESTIMATE 2] key. The beginning and ending  
depths are marked with dashed lines. A circle with the number 1 or number 2  
inside is displayed, shown by a dashed line.  
Note: The processing range, that is, the area between the dashed lines, can  
be selected with ESTIMATE ON ES in the MARK SIZE menu. The  
choices available are 1/8 (default setting), 1/4 and 1/2, of the echo  
sounder display range.  
2. Observe the fish histogram. See next page.  
3. To turn off the estimate mark, press the [ESTIMATE 1] or [ESTIMATE 2] key  
whichever was pressed at step 1.  
Fish histogram  
(Automatically appears when  
estimate mark is active.  
See next page.)  
Fish estimate mark  
N
FISH HISTOGRAM  
ES  
WATER CURRENT*  
C1 1.2kt 342°  
C2 0.8kt 298°  
C3 0.4kt 256°  
1
NET DEPTH*  
S1 134m  
S2 178m  
S3 213m  
ES  
2
0
40  
1
Fish school concentration  
is calculated for echoes  
within the beginning and  
ending depths  
80  
S
Estimate mark 1  
Estimating fish concentration with estimate marks  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
Fish histogram  
The fish histogram shows, in graph form, signal strength distribution for the fish  
school(s) marked with an estimate mark on the horizontal and echo sounder  
displays. The histogram display for each of those displays will be different since  
the calculation method is different. This data appears only when an estimate  
mark is active. When two estimate marks are active histograms are displayed  
one on top of the other as below.  
The horizontal axis shows signal strength in 16 colors, and the vertical axis  
shows fish school concentration inside the fish estimate mark. For the fish  
estimate mark inscribed on the horizontal display the graph shows the average  
movement in five scans, to increase accuracy.  
Note: The histogram display is redrawn five transmissions after a fish estimate  
mark is erased and another mark of the same number is entered soon after.  
Fish estimate  
mark source  
SCAN1 for H1 display  
SCAN2 for H2 display  
2 SCAN1  
1 ES2  
Fish estimate  
mark no.  
2 SCAN1  
Blank when no estimate mark  
is inscribed on the horizontal  
display  
Estimate mark 1 or estimate Both estimate marks displayed  
mark 2 displayed  
Fish histogram  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.9 ES1 SETTING Menu Overview  
Display the ES1 SETTING menu as follows.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ES1 SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ES1 SETTING  
GAIN  
: 5  
RANGE  
: 160 m  
: 0 m  
: 0  
SHIFT  
CLUTTER  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
INT REJECT  
: 0  
: OFF  
PICTURE ADVANCE : 1/1  
PICT ADVC AT SHOOT : SPEED SYNC  
COLOR SETTING...  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
SCALE POSITION  
: RIGHT  
ES1 SETTING menu  
ES1 setting menu description  
The GAIN, RANGE, SHIFT and PICTURE ADVANCE are described at the  
previous pages. For the COLOR SETTING and the COLOR RESPONSE, see  
page 2-48 and 2-49, respectively.  
CLUTTER: Suppress low level noise, which shows itself on the display as  
light-blue dots. The setting range is 0-10 and 0 is clutter rejection off. The higher  
the setting, the greater the degree of suppression.  
SIGNAL LEVEL: Dirty water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the  
screen in green or light-blue. These echoes may be erased in order of strength.  
The setting range is 0-15.  
INT REJECT: Turn on to suppress interference from other equipment on board.  
PICT ADVC AT SHOOT: Sets picture advance speed to set when shooting of  
the net. You may select advance speed independently or synchronize it with  
ship’s speed.  
SCALE POSITION: The range scale can be displayed on the right or left side of  
the echo sounder display.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. ECHO SOUNDER MODE  
5.10 ES2 SETTING Menu Overview  
Display the ES2 SETTING menu as follows.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
Select ES2 SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ES2 SETTING  
GAIN  
: 5  
RANGE BELOW NET  
RANGE UPPER NET  
CLUTTER  
: 160 m  
: 160 m  
: 0  
SIGNAL LEVEL  
: 0  
INT REJECT  
: OFF  
: 1/1  
PICTURE ADVANCE  
COLOR SETTING...  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
NET RECORDER DISP : UP/DOWN  
NET RECORDER RANGE : 80 m  
ES2 SETTING menu (net recorder connected)  
ES2 SETTING menu description  
The GAIN and PICTURE ADVANCE are described at the previous pages. For  
the COLOR SETTING and the COLOR RESPONSE, see page 2-48 and 2-49,  
respectively.  
RANGE or RANGE BELOW NET: Selects the echo sounder display range,  
among 20, 40, 60, 80, 120, 160, 240, 320 m and interlock with ES1. With  
connection of a net recorder it is the range below the oscillation line.  
SHIFT or RANGE UPPER NET: Shifts the display range for ES. The shift range  
is 0-1000 m. Note that RANGE (above) must be set to INTERLOCK to set  
SHIFT to INTERLOCK. With connection of a net recorder it is the range above  
the oscillation line. Select the range among 20, 40, 60, 80, 120, 240 and 320 m.  
CLUTTER: See CLUTTER on previous page.  
SIGNAL LEVEL: See SIGNAL LEVEL on previous page.  
INT REJECT: See INT REJECT on previous page.  
NET RECORDER DISP: Chooses the net recorder picture to display; downward  
sounding picture or both upward and downward sounding pictures. The default  
setting is the downward sounding picture.  
NET RECORDER RANGE: Sets the net recorder display range, referring to the  
operator’s manual of net recorder.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. HISTORY MODE  
6.1  
Basic Operating Procedure  
4. Select history mode.  
2. Lower transducer.  
: Mid protrusion  
: Full protrusion  
3. Adjust display brilliance.  
8. Set position.  
1. Turn on power.  
FSV-84  
V1/S  
HSV  
5. Select range.  
7. Set tilt angle.  
6. Adjust gain.  
Control unit  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. HISTORY MODE  
6.2  
Sample History Display  
The history display shows echo data for the echoes within the history marker,  
which is a 120° arc centered on the own ship position on the horizontal display.  
The history marker scrolls downward on the history display – the latest echoes at  
the top and the oldest at the bottom. Echoes are averaged for three  
transmissions for easy viewing. This mode is useful for watching echo condition  
over a period of time.  
Use the trackball to select location for the history marker. When the tilt angle is  
changed, the slant range is automatically changed to keep the history marker at  
a constant depth; however, like an echo sounder, the picture inscribed before the  
tilt angle was changed is not refreshed.  
N
NUMERIC/GRAPHIC  
DATA DISPLAY  
560m  
51m  
History  
marker  
S
Horizontal Display  
History Display  
History display  
History marker  
B
A
B
D
A
Depth  
C
History marker and echo location  
A
B
C
D
History mode concept  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. HISTORY MODE  
6.3 How to Interpret, Set the History Display  
6.3.1  
Interpreting the history display  
Echo data inside  
history marker  
185m  
156m  
Horizontal range  
Depth  
HISTORY MARKER  
History marker  
width*  
History  
marker  
Color bar  
*Set on H-SLICE WIDTH  
in DISPLAY SETTING  
menu. See next page.  
Own ship  
mark  
Own ship mark  
Trackball mark  
Scroll direction  
Sync with ship speed  
or KP transmission  
180  
120°  
† Automatically  
changes with  
tilt angle.  
Distance from  
own ship position  
to bow (or stern)  
Slant  
range†  
35P  
Distance from own ship position to port (or starboard)  
P: Port  
S: Starboard  
How to interpret the history display  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. HISTORY MODE  
6.3.2  
Setting the history marker  
Use the trackball to locate the trackball marker on the horizontal display and  
then press the [R/B AUDIO] key. The history marker moves to the trackball  
marker and is centered on the ship’s bow, extending 60° in both port and  
starboard directions. Own ship mark is fixed at own ship position. The slant  
range is automatically changed whenever the tilt angle is changed, to keep the  
history marker at a constant depth. When the tilt angle is shallow and the slant  
range to the history marker is greater than the range set with the RANGE control,  
the sampling point becomes the range in use.  
The slant range is automatically changed whenever  
the tilt angle is changed, to keep the history marker  
at a constant depth. When a shallow tilt angle is used,  
the picture inside the history marker is  
d
d
r
(3)  
(2)  
(1)  
from (1)(2)(3), according to tilt angle.  
R
History marker  
R: Range (Range set by RANGE control)  
r: Slant range to history marker, set with trackball. Automatically changes with tilt angle.  
d: Depth (constant) to history marker  
Slant range and tilt angle  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. HISTORY MODE  
6.3.3  
Setting the width of the history marker  
You may set the width of the history marker as follows:  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
DISPLAY SETTING  
DISPLAY MODE...  
MODE SELECTION  
TX/RX MODE  
: MODE KEY  
: ALTERNATIVE  
: LANDSCAPE  
H2/S DISPLAY  
PRESENTATION MODE : HEAD UP  
TM DISPLAY RANGE  
BEARING REF  
TILT LEVER  
: 1.6R  
: SHIP HEADING  
: TILT  
S AUTO OFF CENTER : OFF  
H-SLICE WIDTH  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC  
NET COURSE MARK  
MANUAL DEGAUSS  
AUTO DEGAUSS  
DIMMER  
: 16  
: KP SYNC  
: ENTER  
: EXECUTE  
: INT SENSOR  
: 10  
KEY BEEP VOLUME  
: 5  
DISPLAY SETTING menu  
4. Select H-SLICE WIDTH and press the [MENU] key.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
1
2
4
8
16  
32  
Horizontal slice width dialog box  
5. Use the trackball to select 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 as appropriate and press the  
[MENU] key.  
The numeric options are the number of display dots. For example, “16”, the  
default setting, extracts 16 dots from the horizontal display.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. HISTORY MODE  
6.3.4  
Setting the picture advance mode  
You may choose to advance the picture at each transmission (KP SYNC) or in  
proportion to ship speed (SPEED SYNC).  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select H-SLICE PICT ADVC and press the [MENU] key.  
5. Select SPEED SYNC or KP SYNC as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
7. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. NUMERIC/GRAPHIC DATA  
DISPLAY  
7.1  
Full Numeric/Graphic Data Display  
This display provides comprehensive Numeric/graphic data and appears with the  
horizontal and vertical displays, at the right side of the display.  
Heading*  
Course*  
HEADING  
321  
335  
12.5kt  
°
°
SHIP COURSE  
SHIP SPEED  
Speed*  
Position format  
Navigator type (in brackets)*  
LAT/LON[DGPS]  
DGPS: Differrential GPS  
KGPS: Kinematic GPS  
FGPS: Floating GPS  
GPS: GPS  
32  
°
52.150N  
12.150E  
132  
°
DEPTH  
321m  
WATER CURRENT  
LC:  
Loran C  
DR:  
Dead Reckoniong  
Position error  
***:  
C1  
C2  
C3  
1.2kt  
0.8kt  
0.4kt  
342  
298  
256  
°
°
°
Depth  
Water current speed  
and direction for three  
layers*  
NET DEPTH  
S1  
S2  
S3  
134m  
178m  
213m  
Net sonde depth  
data*  
FISH HISTOGRAM  
Fish histogram  
(See page 5-14.)  
1
SCAN1  
Water temperture*,  
Water temperature  
graph*  
WATER TEMP  
10.3°C  
20MIN  
12  
10  
0
FISH SCHOOL INFO  
TARGET LOCK ON  
(MARK INTERLOCK:  
EST & HISTGRAM  
LENGTH  
WIDTH  
HEIGHT  
51 m  
47 m  
24 m  
2564 m2  
45805 m3  
59 t  
10  
8
at TARGET LOCK menu) DIMENSIONS  
VOLUME  
TARGET LOCK OFF WEIGHT  
* Requires appropriate sensor.  
Full Numeric/graphic data display  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. NUMERIC/GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY  
7.2  
Abbreviated Numeric/Graphic Data Display  
This display appears at the top right-hand corner when the history, ES 1 and ES  
2 displays are active. The items shown depend on whether the fish estimate  
mark or net shoot mark is ON or OFF as below.  
Heading*  
Course*  
Speed*  
HEADING  
321  
335  
12.5kt  
°
*
WATER TEMP 10.3  
°C*  
Water temperature*,  
Water temperature  
graph*  
SHIP COURSE  
SHIP SPEED  
LAT/LON[DGPS]*  
°
*
20MIN  
10  
0
*
12  
10  
Nav data format,  
navigator name*  
32  
°
52.150N  
12.150E  
321m  
*
Latitude and  
longitude position*  
132  
°
*
8
DEPTH  
Depth  
FISH HISTOGRAM  
SCAN  
WATER CURRENT*  
C1  
C2  
C3  
1.2kt  
0.8kt  
0.4kt  
342  
298  
256  
°
°
°
1
NET DEPTH*  
S1  
S2  
S3  
134m  
178m  
213m  
TARGET LOCK ON  
(MARK INTERLOCK:  
EST&HISTGRAM  
at TARGET LOCK menu)  
* Requires appropriate  
sensor  
FISH SCHOOL INFO  
LENGTH  
WIDTH  
51 m  
47 m  
24 m  
2564 m2  
45805 m3  
59 t  
HEIGHT  
DIMENSIONS  
VOLUME  
WEIGHT  
Abbreviated Numeric/graphic display  
Note: Numeric/graphic data may be turned on/off and format selected. For  
further details see Chapter 9.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. NUMERIC/GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY  
7.3 Numeric/Graphic Data Description  
When a data is lost its last-entered value is shown in red. Data displays can be  
turned on or off through the DATA DISPLAY menu.  
Numeric/graphic data description  
Numeric/ Description  
graphic  
data item  
Display  
range  
Available  
formats  
Where to  
change  
format  
Heading Shows heading input from 32 comp. pts.  
32 comp. pts.  
DATA  
heading sensor.  
0-359°  
DISPLAY  
menu  
360° True  
Course  
Speed  
Shows ship’s course fed  
from Numeric/graphic  
indication.  
32 comp. pts,  
0-359°  
0-359°  
1-179° P/S, 0°,  
180°  
32 comp. pts.  
360° True  
DATA  
DISPLAY  
menu  
360° Rel  
180° Rel  
Shows ship’s speed fed  
from a Numeric/graphic  
indication.  
0-40 kts  
Fixed at knots  
Pos.  
Sensor  
Shows sensor which  
inputs position data. When FGPS, GPS, LC,  
there is no position data,  
only brackets ([ ])  
appear.  
DPGS, KGPS,  
GPS  
Loran -C  
DR  
SYSTEM  
menu  
(See your  
dealer.)  
DR  
Auto  
L/L  
Position  
Current  
Depth  
Ship’s position in latitude  
and longitude. If position  
data is lost the  
last-entered position is  
shown in red.  
Lat: 90°00.000S-  
90°00.000N  
Lon:  
179°59.999W-  
179°59.999E,  
180°00.00  
Shows tide speed and  
direction for three layers  
or tide and speed for two  
layers against a reference  
layer fed from a current  
indication.  
Cur. Speed: 0-9.9  
kt  
Direction: 0-359°  
Direction shown CURRENT  
as “flow from,”  
or “flow to.”  
VEC &  
WIND menu  
Shows depth from  
transducer to bottom  
0-9999m  
0-999m  
Meters  
Net  
Sonde  
Depth of net sonde  
transmitter. Shown only at  
shooting of net.  
Depth of up to  
3 pts can be  
displayed.  
NET SONDE  
SETTING  
menu  
(Continued on next page)  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. NUMERIC/GRAPHIC DATA DISPLAY  
Numeric/graphic data description (con’t. from previous page)  
Numeric/  
graphic data  
item  
Description  
Display  
range  
Available  
formats  
Where to  
change  
format  
Water temp. Shows water temperature  
input from a temperature  
sensor.  
-10.0°C to +40.0°C, °C,  
14.0° F to 104.0°F °F  
DATA  
DISPLAY  
menu  
Water temp. Shows water temperature  
Horizontal axis: Time °C,  
DATA  
DISPLAY  
menu  
graph  
over time.  
20 min (fixed)  
°F  
Horizontal axis: 20 min.  
Vertical axis: °C (°F)  
Vertical axis: Temp.  
5°C, 10°F, fixed  
width, auto shift)  
Fish histo-  
gram  
Shows signal strength  
2 marks  
For further details see “6.  
Comparing Fish  
Concentration”.  
concentration of fish estimate  
mark inscribed on horizontal  
display, echo sounder display  
Fish school Shows fish school information Length: Distance to fish school in range direction  
Info.  
during target lock operation.  
Width: Distance to fish school in bearing direction  
Height: Vertical distance  
Dimensions: Horizontal dimension of fish school  
Volume: Estimated volume of fish school  
Weight: Estimated tonnage of fish school,  
calculated  
from dimension or volume above.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
8.1  
User Menu  
You may program 10 often-used menu items to the user menu area in the menu.  
The default user menu contains pulse length, Tx power, TVG near, TVG medium,  
TVG far, AGC, 2nd AGC, echo average, color, and color response from the  
H-SCAN SETTING menu.  
MENU  
QUIT  
TX PULSE LENGTH-H : 9  
TX POWER-H  
TVG-NEAR-H  
TVG-MEDIUM-H  
TVG-FAR-H  
AGC-H  
: 9  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
User menu area  
: 0  
2ND AGC-H  
ECHO AVERAGE  
COLOR-H  
: 0  
: 0  
: COLOR 1  
COLOR RESPONSE-H : COLOR CURVE 3  
H-SCAN SETTING...  
V-SCAN SETTING...  
OTHERS...  
Main menu (user menu)  
8.1.1  
Deleting items from user menu  
The equipment is pre-programmed with ten user menu items. To change the  
user menu you must first delete a menu item from the user menu which you do  
not require.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select the item to delete.  
3. Press and hold down the [MENU] key more than one second to show the  
following dialog box.  
DELETE REGISTRATION  
YES  
SELECTED ITEM WILL BE  
REMOVED FROM MAIN MENU.  
NO  
Dialog box for deleting item from user (main) menu  
4. Select YES and press the [MENU] key. The dialog box is then closed and the  
selected item is deleted from the user menu.  
5. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
8.1.2  
Programming the user menu  
The procedure below shows you how to add the menu item PRESENTATION  
MODE (for selecting presentation mode) to the user menu. Not all menu items  
may be programmed to the user menu. See the menu tree on page AP-1 to AP-4  
for items which can be programmed. The order of items in the USER menu  
cannot be changed.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
DISPLAY SETTING  
DISPLAY MODE...  
MODE SELECTION  
TX/RX MODE  
: MODE KEY  
: ALTERNATIVE  
: LANDSCAPE  
H2/S DISPLAY  
PRESENTATION MODE : HEAD UP  
TM DISPLAY RANGE  
BEARING REF  
TILT LEVER  
: 1.6R  
: SHIP HEADING  
: TILT  
S AUTO OFF CENTER : OFF  
H-SLICE WIDTH  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC  
NET COURSE MARK  
MANUAL DEGAUSS  
AUTO DEGAUSS  
DIMMER  
: 16  
: KP SYNC  
: ENTER  
: EXECUTE  
: INT SENSOR  
: 10  
KEY BEEP VOLUME  
: 5  
DISPLAY SETTING menu  
4. Select PRESENTATION MODE and press the [MENU] key for more than one  
second. The dialog box appears.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
HEAD UP  
NORTH UP  
COURSE UP  
TRUE MOTION  
Presentation mode dialog box  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
After the dialog box disappears the following message appears.  
USER MENU REGISTRATION  
YES  
NO  
SELECTED ITEM WILL BE  
REGISTERED IN MAIN MENU.  
Message for registration of user menu item  
Note: If 10 items are already registered to the user menu the following  
message appears. Delete unnecessary items from the user menu and then  
repeat this procedure to register different item.  
CAUTION  
10 ITEMS ALREADY REGISTERED.  
DELETE UNNECESSARY ITEMS  
AND TRY AGAIN.  
Caution for registration of user menu item  
5. Select YES and press the [MENU] key to register item selected to the menu.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
8.2  
Function Keys (F1-F6)  
The function keys provide one-touch display of desired menu item or entire  
menu. The default function key settings are as below. Not all menu items and  
menus may be programmed to the function keys. See the menu tree on page  
AP-1 to AP-4 for items which may be programmed.  
The default settlings are as below:  
F1: PICTURE SHOT  
Store current picture  
F2: RECALL PICTURE  
Recall picture in memory  
F3: PRESENTATION MODE  
Select presentation mode  
F4: DIMMER  
Adjust panel dimmer  
F5: EVENT MARK  
Erase event mark  
F6: SHIP’S TRACK  
Erase ship’s track  
8.2.1  
Executing a function  
1. Press desired function key. An appropriate dialog box appears.  
2. Press the same function key again within five seconds to execute function.  
(The function dialog box is automatically erased after five seconds.)  
Example default function programs  
F1: Storing picture  
Press the [F1] key twice to save the current picture.  
<<PICTURE SHOT>>  
OVERWRITE PREVIOUS PICTURE  
SAVED. PRESS THE KEY AGAIN TO  
PROCEED.  
Press [F1] key.  
<<PICTURE SHOT>>  
COMPLETE TO SAVE THE PICTURE.  
Function dialog box for storing picture  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
F2: Recalling picture  
Press the [F2] key to recall the picture stored in the memory.  
<<PLAYBACK MODE>>  
PRESS FUNCTION KEY AGAIN TO CANCEL.  
Function dialog box for recalling picture  
Note: If a picture is not stored, the message “Warning! The picture is not stored”  
appears.  
F3: Presentation mode  
Use the [F3] key to select presentation mode.  
<<PRESENTATION MODE>>  
HEAD UP NORTH UP COURSE UP TRUE MOTION  
Dialog box for selection of presentation mode  
F4: Panel dimmer  
Use the [F4] key to adjust the panel dimmer.  
<<DIMMER>>  
10  
Dialog box for adjustment of panel dimmer  
F5: Erase event mark  
Use the [F5] key to erase event marks successively.  
<<ERASE EVENT MARK>>  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press [F5].  
<<ERASE EVENT MARK>>  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function dialog box for erasing fish marks  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
F6: Erase ship’s track  
1. Press the [F6] key. The following dialog box appears.  
<<ERASE SHIP TRACK>>  
100 %  
Dialog box for erase ship track  
2. Press the [F6] key again. The oldest part of the track will be erased. Each  
pressing erases approximately 10% of the track.  
8.2.2  
Programming function keys  
You can change the default setting of a function key as shown below. Note that  
all menu items may not be programmed to the function keys. See the menu tree  
on page AP-1 to AP-4 for items which can be programmed for function keys.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Display the menu item which you want to assign to a function key.  
3. Press desired function key for more than one second. The display shows the  
following message for five seconds at the top of the screen.  
(FUNCTION KEY REGISTRATION)  
REPLACE THE FUNCTION TO NEW  
SETTING. PRESS THE KEY AGAIN  
TO PROCEED.  
Confirmation for registering function key  
4. Press the same function key again, and the following message appears. This  
completes the procedure for programming a function key.  
(FUNCTION KEY REGISTRATION)  
REGISTRATION COMPLETED.  
Confirmation for registering function key  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
8.2.3  
Erasing programs  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select PRESET, MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD  
ASSIGN USER PROG...  
CLEAR F-KEY SETTING...  
H/S-SCAN RANGE  
V-SCAN RANGE  
PICTURE SHOT  
: EXECUTE  
PICTURE RECALL : EXECUTE  
MEMORY CARD...  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu  
4. Select CLEAR F-KEY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
5. Select YES and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Select function key for which you want to erase its program.  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Function key dialog box  
7. Press the [MENU] key.  
8. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
9. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
8.3  
USER PROG Control  
The [USER PROG] control provides for instant setup of the equipment according  
to fishing ground or target fish. Ten programs may be set up, and vertical and  
horizontal display settings may be programmed together or individually. (The  
default settings programs them together.) For how to program them individually  
see your dealer.  
8.3.1  
8.3.2  
Selecting a user program  
Rotate the [USER PROG] control clockwise or counterclockwise to select  
program desired. Selected program no. appears at the top right-hand corner of  
the screen to the right of “P”. If the equipment is turned off with a user program  
active, it starts up with those settings at the next power on.  
Programming the USER PROG control  
1. Set the equipment as desired. You can set up all items on the H-SCAN  
SETTING and V-SCAN SETTING menus as desired.  
2. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select PRESET, MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key. One of the  
following menus appears depending on the setting of “SELECT USER  
PROG” on the MISC menu of the SYSTEM menu. (For SYSTEM menu,  
contact your dealer or refer to installation manual.)  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD  
ASSIGN USER PROG-H...  
ASSIGN USER PROG-V...  
CLEAR F-KEY SETTING  
H/S-SCAN RANGE  
ASSIGN USER PROG...  
CLEAR F-KEY SETTING...  
H/S-SCAN RANGE  
V-SCAN RANGE  
V-SCAN RANGE  
PICTURE SHOT  
PICTURE RECALL  
MEMORY CARD...  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
PICTURE SHOT  
PICTURE RECALL  
MEMORY CARD...  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
User program set jointly for  
horizontal and vertical displays  
User program set individually for  
horizontal and vertical displays  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu  
5. Select ASSIGN USER PROG, ASSIGN USER PROG-H/S or ASSIGN USER  
PROG-V as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
6. Select YES and press the [MENU] key to confirm the CAUTION indicated.  
One of the following displays appears depending on your selection.  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
CANCEL  
CANCEL  
to P1  
to P2  
to P3  
to P4  
to P5  
to P6  
to P7  
to P8  
to P9  
to P10  
P1-H/S  
P2-H/S  
P3-H/S  
P4-H/S  
P5-H/S  
P6-H/S  
P7-H/S  
P8-H/S  
P9-H/S  
P10-H/S  
P1-V  
P2-V  
P3-V  
P4-V  
P5-V  
P6-V  
P7-V  
P8-V  
P9-V  
P10-V  
Horizontal  
Vertical  
Horizontal, Vertical Linked  
User program options  
7. Use the trackball to select program no. desired and press the [MENU] key.  
8. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
9. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key to  
close all menus.  
Note: Slant mode user programs are effective when the slant display is selected.  
Slant display: user programs for slant mode  
Slant combination display: Horizontal display user programs when  
horizontal display is active.  
Slant display user programs when slant  
display is active.  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. CUSTOMIZING THE EQUIPMENT  
This page intentionally left blank.  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
This chapter provides descriptions for the OTHERS menu, which consists of 16  
menus. To display the OTHERS menu, press the [MENU] key, select OTHERS  
and press the [MENU] key again.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
ES1 SETTING...  
ES2 SETTING...  
ERASE MARKS...  
DISPLAY SETTING...  
ALARM & AUDIO...  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD...  
INITIAL SETTING...  
OTHERS menu  
Note that the ES1 SETTING and ES2 SETTING menus set up the echo sounder  
and net recorder displays, respectively. For further details, see Chapter 5.  
9.1 ERASE MARKS menu  
This menu lets you delete selected marks and track, from earliest to latest.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ERASE and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ERASE MARKS  
EVENT MARK  
FISH MARK  
OWN SHIP POS MARK: DELETE  
SHIP'S TRACK : DELETE  
: DELETE  
: DELETE  
ERASE MARKS menu  
4. Select the mark you want to delete and press the [MENU] key. The earliest  
mark is deleted. For ship’s track, approximately 10% of the track is erased  
with each press of the [MENU] key.  
5. Press the [MENU] key again to continue deleting mark selected.  
6. Select QUIT at the top of the menu screen and press the [MENU] key.  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
9.2  
DISPLAY SETTING menu  
The DISPLAY SETTING menu sets various display parameters.  
9.2.1  
Opening the DISPLAY SETTING menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select DISPLAY SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
DISPLAY SETTING  
DISPLAY MODE...  
MODE SELECTION  
TX/RX MODE  
: MODE KEY  
: ALTERNATIVE  
: LANDSCAPE  
H2/S DISPLAY  
PRESENTATION MODE : HEAD UP  
TM DISPLAY RANGE  
BEARING REF  
TILT LEVER  
: 1.6R  
: SHIP HEADING  
: TILT  
S AUTO OFF CENTER : OFF  
H-SLICE WIDTH  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC  
NET COURSE MARK  
MANUAL DEGAUSS  
AUTO DEGAUSS  
DIMMER  
: 16  
: KP SYNC  
: ENTER  
: EXECUTE  
: INT SENSOR  
: 10  
KEY BEEP VOLUME  
: 5  
DISPLAY SETTNG menu  
9.2.2  
DISPLAY SETTING menu description  
DISPLAY MODE: Selects the display modes to use. The default modes are  
Horizontal, Horizontal1 + Horizontal2, Vertical1, Vertical 1 + Vertical 2, and  
History.  
MODE SELECTION: Determines how display modes are chosen: cyclical  
pressing of [MODE] key or pull-down menu. The default setting is MODE KEY.  
TX/RX MODE: Select how to transmit and receive in combination displays.  
ALTERNATIVE executes Tx and Rx one display at a time. MULTI simultaneously  
executes Tx and Rx on each display.  
H2/S DISPLAY: Selects the combination mode of two horizontal displays:  
Landscape, Portrait, Right Inset and Left Inset.  
PRESENTATION MODE: Chooses presentation mode. Head-up, north-up,  
course-up and true motion (requires ship’s speed and heading data) are  
available, and the default setting is head-up.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
TM DISPLAY RANGE: Selects how many times to expand the display range in  
the true motion mode. 1.3R (R = Range) and 1.6R are available and the default  
setting is 1.6R.  
BEARING REF: Selects how to reference bearing for the vertical bearing marker.  
The choices are ship’s heading (default) and North.  
TILT LEVER: Chooses function of the TILT control.  
TILT:  
Sets the tilt only.  
TILT & V1: Sets the bearing of the vertical 1 display in the vertical display, and  
sets the tilt in the horizontal display.  
S AUTO OFF CENTER: Choose the train value in automatic own ship position  
offset in the slant mode. The choices are 30°, 45°, 60° and OFF and the default  
setting is 45°. AUTO TRAIN must be turned on to activate this function.  
H-SLICE WIDTH: Chooses width of the history marker in the history display. The  
choices are 1, 2, 4 and 8, 16 (default setting) and 32. The higher the number the  
greater the width.  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC: Determines how to advance the history display, by KP  
SYNC (default setting) or ship’s speed.  
NET COURSE MARK: Inscribes/deletes the net course mark. For further details  
see “2.19 Net Course Mark”.  
MANUAL DEGAUSS: In the default setting the screen is automatically  
degaussed by the internal sensor when it detects stray magnetic fields on the  
screen. If you want to degauss the screen manually select MANUAL DEGAUSS  
and press the [MENU] key. Execute degaussing in intervals; consecutive  
degaussing may result in color distortion.  
AUTO DEGAUSS: Selects how to degauss the screen automatically.  
OFF: Turns automatic degaussing off.  
TIMER: Degausses at regular intervals.  
GYRO: Using heading data from a heading sensor, degaussing occurs when  
heading change exceeds a certain value.  
INT SENSOR: Degaussing occurs when the sensor in the monitor unit detects  
heading change which exceeds a certain value. This option is only operative on  
the FURUNO monitor unit FSV-2400.  
DIMMER: Adjusts backlighting of the control panel. The setting range is 1-10  
and the default setting is 10 (maximum).  
KEY BEEP VOLUME: Sets the volume of the beep which sounds for key  
operation. The setting range is 0-7. “0” turns off the key beep.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
9.3  
ALARM & AUDIO menu  
9.3.1  
Opening the ALARM & AUDIO menu  
The ALARM & AUDIO menu sets the fish alarm and the audio bearing mark  
sector.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select ALARM & AUDIO and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
ALARM & AUDIO  
FISH ALARM  
: OFF  
ALARM LEVEL  
ALARM ZONE...  
SHIP SPEED ALARM  
AUDIO  
: 16  
: ON  
: ON  
: 30°  
: 0  
AUDIO SECTOR  
REVERBERATION  
ALARM & AUDIO menu  
9.3.2  
ALARM & AUDIO menu description  
FISH ALARM: Turns the fish alarm function on or off. The default setting is off.  
ALARM LEVEL: Sets the minimum echo color which triggers the fish alarm. The  
setting range is 0-30 and the default setting is 16.  
ALARM ZONE: Sets fish alarm zone. For further details see “2.14 Fish Alarm”.  
SHIP SPEED ALARM: The default setting is on. So if the ship speed exceeds  
limit speed (See page 11-5) during transducer raising/lowering or being  
extended the buzzer sounds. You can set this alarm deactivated.  
AUDIO: Turns the audio function on (default setting) or off. For further details  
see “2.12 Detecting Fish Schools Aurally”.  
AUDIO SECTOR: Choose audio sector width for use with audio function. The  
choices are 0°, 60°, 90°, 180° and 330°. For further details see “2.12 Detecting  
Fish Schools Aurally”.  
REVERBERATION: Chooses length of reverberation for audio signal. The  
setting range is 0-9 and the default setting is 0 (no reverberation). The larger the  
value the longer the reverberation.  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
9.4  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu  
9.4.1  
Opening the PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu  
This menu presets various functions and provides memory card operations.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select PRESET, MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD  
ASSIGN USER PROG...  
CLEAR F-KEY SETTING  
H/S-SCAN RANGE  
V-SCAN RANGE  
PICTURE SHOT  
PICTURE RECALL  
MEMORY CARD...  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu  
9.4.2  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu description  
ASSIGN USER PROG: Programs the USER PROG control. For further details  
see “9.3 USER PROG Control”.  
Note: In the default setting any user program adjusts the horizontal and vertical  
displays together. Individual programming for the horizontal and vertical displays  
is also available. For further details contact your dealer.  
CLEAR F-KEY SETTING: Erases program assigned to a function key. For  
further details see “8.2.3 Erasing programs”.  
H/S-SCAN RANGE: Presets the horizontal and slant mode ranges as selected  
with the [RANGE] control. The setting range is 60-2000 m.  
V-SCAN RANGE: Presets the vertical scan ranges as selected with the  
[RANGE] control. The setting range and default settings are the same as that for  
H-SCAN RANGE.  
PICTURE SHOT: Temporarily stores current picture. For further details see “2.21  
Storing, Recalling Picture”.  
PICTURE RECALL: Replays picture stored in memory. For further details see  
“2.21 Storing, Recalling Picture”.  
MEMORY CARD: Memory card operations. For further details see Chapter 10.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
9.5  
INITIAL SETTING menu  
9.5.1  
Opening the INITIAL SETTING menu  
This menu provides 10 sub menus which perform such tasks as mark  
configuration and size.  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select INITIAL SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select YES and press the [MENU] key to confirm the CAUTION indicated.  
The following menu appears.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
INITIAL SETTING  
MARK DISPLAY...  
MARK SIZE...  
DATA DISPLAY...  
CURRENT VEC & WIND...  
NET SONDE SETTING...  
NET SHOOT SETTING...  
TARGET LOCK...  
STABILIZATION...  
TEST...  
INITIALIZATION...  
INITIAL SETTING menu  
The TARGET LOCK menu is described in section 2.11. For the TEST menu, see  
to Chapter 11.  
9.5.2  
INITIAL SETTING menu description  
MARK DISPLAY menu  
This menu turns on/off marks on the horizontal display. All items except DATA  
ON TRACK are turned on in the default setting.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
MARK DISPLAY  
HEADING MARK  
: ON  
RANGE RINGS  
BEARING SCALE  
SHIP'S TRACK  
DATA ON TRACK  
NET MOVEMENT PLOT  
FISH MARK CONNECT  
TARGET VECTOR  
FISH TRACK PLOT  
FISH HISTOGRAM  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: OFF  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
: ON  
MARK DISPLAY menu  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
HEADING MARK: The heading mark is a dashed line which indicates the  
heading in all presentation modes. It extends from own ship position to the outer  
edge of the display and appears at zero degrees in the head-up mode. It  
changes the orientation depending on ship’s orientation in the north-up,  
course-up and true motion modes.  
Heading mark  
Heading mark  
RANGE RINGS: The range rings are the dotted line circles about own ship, and  
they provide an estimate of the range to a target. Rings appear every distance of  
1/2 or 1/4 of the range depending on menu setting.  
R200  
100  
Range rings  
BEARING SCALE: The bearing scale is the concentric solid circle at the edge of  
the display. It provides an estimate of the bearing to a target.  
N
W
E
S
Bearing scale  
SHIP’S TRACK: Traces ship’s movement with a solid line. When the capacity of  
the track memory is exceeded the earliest track is automatically erased to trace  
new track. Requires ships speed and course data.  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
DATA ON TRACK: Shows depth or water temperature on the ship’s track. The  
display range for temperature and depth are  
Water Temperature: -10°C to 40.0°C (+14°F to 105.0°F)  
Depth: 0 to 9999 m  
Track  
120  
124  
Depth  
(or water temperature)  
125  
Data on ship’s track  
NET MOVEMENT PLOT: Shows predicted net movement against three current  
layers over time. Automatically turned on or off with the net shoot mark.  
Track  
Net  
Net movement plot  
for three current layers  
Net movement plot  
FISH MARK CONNECT: You may connect fish marks with a line to show the  
order in which they were entered.  
Fish marks connected with line  
Fish marks connected with line  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
TARGET VECTOR: This is a line extending from target lock mark which shows  
speed and direction of tracked fish school. See the illustration below for  
appearance.  
FISH TRACK PLOT: Traces target movement in target lock. Requires ship’s  
speed and course data.  
Target vector  
Fish track plot  
Target lock mark  
FISH HISTOGRAM: Shows signal strength distribution for the fish school(s)  
marked with an estimate mark on the horizontal or echo sounder display. For  
further details see page 5-14.  
MARK SIZE menu  
This menu lets you select the size or the marks appearing on the horizontal  
display.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
INITIAL SETTING  
MARK SIZE  
TRACKBALL MARK  
TARGET LOCK MARK  
TARGET VECTOR  
EVENT MARK  
: +SMALL  
: SMALL  
: NORMAL  
: LARGE  
: LARGE  
: SMALL  
: ACTUAL  
: SMALL  
: LARGE  
: 1/8  
FISH MARK  
OWN SHIP POS MARK  
OWN SHIP MARK  
NET SHOOT MARK  
ESTIMATE ON SCAN  
ESTIMATE ON ES  
CURRENT VECTOR  
RANGE RINGS  
: SHORT  
: 1/4R  
SHIP'S TRACK MARK  
: 5R  
MARK SIZE menu  
TRACKBALL MARK: Selects size and appearance of trackball mark. The  
choices are large and small “+” mark, and large and small “mark.  
TARGET LOCK MARK: The target lock mark size is available in large and  
small.  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
TARGET VECTOR: You may display the target vector in short, normal or long  
lengths. Set “long” for slow moving target and “short” for faster moving target.  
EVENT MARK: Chooses event mark size; large or small.  
FISH MARK: Displays the fish mark in large or small size.  
OWN SHIP POS MARK: Shows the own ship position mark in large or small  
size.  
OWN SHIP MARK: Selects size of own ship mark to standard, large or actual.  
NET SHOOT MARK: You may show the net shoot mark in large or small size.  
ESTIMATE ON SCAN: Selects the size of the fish estimate mark on the  
horizontal display for large or small.  
ESTIMATE ON ES: Selects width of fish school concentration calculation area  
on the echo sounder display. The choices are 1/8, 1/4 and 1/2 of the echo  
sounder depth range.  
CURRENT VECTOR: The length of the current vector may be set to short or  
long.  
RANGE RINGS: Selects the range ring interval; 1/4R or 1/2R (R = Range).  
SHIP’S TRACK MARK: Selects the amount of track to display; 5R, 10R, 20R,  
40R (R = Range).  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
DATA DISPLAY menu  
This menu sets the readout format for marks on the display.  
Default settings are shown in the illustration below.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
DATA DISPLAY  
RANGE & BEARING  
CURSOR POSITION  
COURSE  
: ON  
: OFF  
: 32 CMPS  
: 360˚TRUE  
: 32 CMPS  
: ±180˚ REL  
CURRENT DATA  
EVENT MARK  
OTHER MARKS  
DISTANCE FOR SHOOT : MILE  
WATER TEMP : ˚C  
DATA DISPLAY menu  
RANGE & BEARING: Turns on/off the range and bearing data which appears  
when the range and bearing marks are turned on.  
CURSOR POSITION: Turns on/off the cursor position (latitude and longitude)  
display. Requires navigation data.  
COURSE: Selects how to display course: 32 compass points, 360 ° True,  
360° Relative, 180° Relative.  
CURRENT DATA: Selects how to display tidal current data; 32 compass points,  
360 ° True, 360° Relative, 180° Relative.  
EVENT MARK: Selects how to display event mark data; 32 compass points,  
360 ° True, 360° Relative, 180° Relative.  
OTHER MARKS: Selects how to display other mark data; 32 compass points,  
360 ° True, 360° Relative, ±180°. ±180° shows xxxS in case of starboard  
direction; xxxP in case of port direction. True indications require heading sensor.  
32 compass points shows bearing with alphabet indication, for example, “NNE”.  
DISTANCE FOR SHOOT: Selects the distance run unit to show the distance run  
after shooting the net. The choices are miles, meters and feet.  
WATER TEMP: Chooses water temperature unit; in °C (Celsius) or °F  
(Fahrenheit).  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
CURRENT VEC & WIND menu  
This menu sets up tidal current and wind data.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
INITIAL SETTING  
CURRENT VEC & WIND  
QUIT  
: ABSOLUTE  
: ON  
CURRENT DATA  
ON OWN SHIP MARK  
ON SHIP POS MARK  
ON NET SHOOT MARK  
CURRENT FLOW DIR  
WIND  
: ON  
: ON  
: TO  
: OFF  
CURRENT VEC & WIND menu  
CURRENT DATA: Chooses how to display current data; absolute or in relation  
to layer 1, layer 2 or layer 3.  
ON OWN SHIP MARK: Selects whether to show the current mark on the own  
ship mark or not.  
ON SHIP POS MARK: Selects whether to show the current mark on the own  
ship position mark or not.  
ON NET SHOOT MARK: Selects whether to show the current mark on the net  
shoot mark or not.  
CURRENT FLOW DIR: Chooses how to display current data. FROM shows  
from what direction the current is flowing; TO shows the direction the current is  
heading. Requires connection of a current indicator.  
Current Vector  
1
3
1
3
2
2
TO  
FROM  
Current flow direction settings  
WIND: Selects wind display; off, relative wind data or true wind data.  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
NET SONDE SETTING menu  
This menu sets up the net sonde (option).  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
NET SONDE SETTING  
NUMBER OF XMTR  
XMTR DISTANCE...  
NET LENGTH  
: 3  
: 1800 m  
: 100 m  
WIRE LENGTH  
DEPTH DISPLAY...  
NET SONDE SETTNG menu  
NUMBER OF XMTR: Sets number of transmitter units used, from 0-10.  
XMTR DISTANCE: Sets the distance between transmitters. Select this item and  
press the [MENU] key to set the distances.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
NET SONDE SETTING  
XMTR DISTANCE  
END OF NET TO S1  
S1 TO S2  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
: 400 m  
S2 TO S3  
S3 TO S4  
S4 TO S5  
S5 TO S6  
S6 TO S7  
S7 TO S8  
S8 TO S9  
S9 TO S10  
XMTR DISTANCE setting window  
NET LENGTH: Sets net length in increments of 100 m. Setting range is 500 m to  
3000m.  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
DEPTH DISPLAY: Selects which sonde depth data to show. Select this item and  
press the [MENU] key to select net sondes. The check mark shows current  
selection (Max. 3).  
QUIT  
CANCEL  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
S9  
S10  
DEPTH DISPLAY menu  
NET SHOOT SETTING menu  
Sets up net shoot parameters.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
NET SHOOT SETTING  
NET DIAMETER  
: 500 m  
TILT INTERLOCK  
: ON  
NET PLOT CORR-LYR1  
NET PLOT CORR-LYR2  
NET PLOT CORR-LYR3  
: 50%  
: 50%  
: 50%  
NET SHOOT SETTING menu  
NET DIAMETER: Sets net diameter in increments of 10 meters. Setting range is  
200 m to 1000 m.  
TILT INTERLOCK: Turns on/off interlocking of diameter of net course mark with  
tilt angle.  
NET PLOT CORR-LYR-1, -2, -3: The movement of the net during net shooting is  
plotted using water current speed and direction fed from a current indicator. The  
current indicator feeds that data for three depths (layers), thus net movement will  
be different at each layer. Determine degree of difference among layers  
considering net, sea conditions, etc. If 50% is set, for example, the net  
movement plot mark moves at speed of 50% of water current speed.  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
STABILIZATION menu  
This menu compensates for pitching and rolling.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
STABILIZATION  
STABILIZATION  
: ON  
: 0.0  
: 0.0  
PITCH ANGLE COR  
ROLL ANGLE COR  
SENSOR  
:
STANDARD  
STABILIZATION menu  
STABILIZATION: Turns stabilization on/off.  
PITCH ANGLE COR: Offsets pitch angle error generated by motion sensor.  
ROLL ANGLE COR: Offsets roll angle error generated by motion sensor.  
SENSOR: Select type of motion sensor used, standard or GPS gyro.  
TEST menu  
This menu conducts various tests. For further details, see Chapter 11.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
INITIAL SETTING  
TEST  
BOARD TEST...  
: EXECUTE  
PANEL TEST...  
TEST PATTERN...  
RX TEST...  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
: OFF  
NOISE TEST...  
TX  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. OTHERS MENU  
INITIALIZATION menu  
This menu restores default settings and offsets time to use local time.  
MENU  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
OTHERS  
INITIAL SETTING  
INITIALIZATION  
QUIT  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
SAVE SHIP'S ORG  
RECALL SHIP'S ORG  
SET TO DEFAULT  
ITEM ATTRIBUTION : NON-CHANGEABLE  
TIME OFFSET...  
INITIALIZATION menu  
SAVE SHIP’S ORG: All menu settings are saved. See note below.  
RECALL SHIP’S ORG: Recall the menu settings which have been saved above.  
See note below.  
SET TO DEFAULT: Restore all default menu settings. See note below.  
ITEM ATTRIBUTION: Locks/unlocks protected menu settings.  
Note: Cannot be changed even if set to CHANGEABLE.  
TIME OFFSET: Memory card files are “stamped” with the time fed from external  
equipment (for example, a GPS navigator), whose time may be different from  
local time. If you want your files to be stamped with the local time set the time  
difference between the time source and local time on this menu item. The setting  
range is –13:59 to 13:59.  
QUIT  
HOUR  
-11  
MIN.  
40  
CANCEL  
Time offset dialog box  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS  
This chapter provides the information necessary for using the memory cards,  
which provide for storage of pictures and configurations (settings).  
10.1 Storing Image, Configuration  
The memory card can store up to 49 files for image data (max 32 files) and  
configuration data (max 32 files), depending on card’s memory capacity and size  
of image file. Configuration files store current settings, and they can be replayed  
to set up the equipment according to fishing ground or target fish.  
The date and time a file is stored is shown in the file list. If there is no time or  
date input when a file is stored the file’s date and time line shows 2000/01/01 as  
the date and 00:00-99:99 as the time.  
Note: Before storing image or configuration to a memory card, you should store  
it into the internal memory. See section 2..21 for the procedure.  
1. Remove the lid at the front of the processor unit.  
2. Insert a memory card face right in the card slot in the processor unit.  
Card  
slot  
Eject  
button  
Processor unit  
3. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
4. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
5. Select PRESET, MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS  
6. Select MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
Note: Never remove a memory card while the access lamp (red) is lit.  
Quits card operation menu.  
Stores current settings.  
Stores image data.  
Formats memory card.  
CARD OPERATION FORMAT SAVE PICT SAVE CONFIG QUIT  
2003/10/01 00:01  
2003/10/01 00:00  
CONFIGURATION  
CONFIGURATION  
File  
list  
Date, time file  
stored  
File type  
READING  
1/1 PREV PAGE NEXT PAGE  
Operation  
READING  
SAVING  
Selects page  
Page no.  
Progress bar  
(Squares fill  
FORMATTING  
with progress.)  
MEMORY CARD menu  
7. Select SAVE PICT or SAVE CONFIGURATION as appropriate and press the  
[MENU] key to store item selected.  
8. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
Note: If the following message appears, there is not enough space on the  
memory card. Delete undesired files, referring to the next section, and  
try again.  
NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN MEMORY CARD.  
DELETE UNDESIRED FILES, AND TRY AGAIN.  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS  
10.2 Loading, Deleting Files  
This section shows you how to load and delete files. You may load files on the  
display to analyze echoes. When a memory card becomes full, you may wish to  
delete unnecessary files.  
1. Insert memory card.  
2. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select PRESET, MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
5. Select MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
CARD OPERATION FORMAT SAVE PICT SAVE CONFIG QUIT  
2003/10/26 12:12  
2003/10/01 00:01  
2003/10/01 00:00  
CONFIGURATION  
CONFIGURATION  
CONFIGURATION  
1/1 PREV PAGE NEXT PAGE  
MEMORY CARD menu  
6. Select a file and press the [MENU] key.  
CARD OPERATION FORMAT SAVE PICT SAVE CONFIG QUIT  
2003/10/26 12:12  
2003/10/20 00:01  
2003/10/01 00:00  
CONFIGURATION  
CANCEL  
RECALL  
DELETE  
CONFIGURATION  
CONFIGURATION  
1/1 PREV PAGE NEXT PAGE  
MEMORY CARD menu, recall, delete dialog box opened  
7. Select RECALL or DELETE as appropriate and press the [MENU] key.  
When you select RECALL, the setting is loaded. Then, rotating the [USER  
PROG] control change a user program.  
8. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
When RECALL is selected, the file from the memory card is now loaded into the  
internal memory. If you want to display the image loaded, refer to “2.21.1  
Recalling stored picture”.  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. MEMORY CARD OPERATIONS  
10.3 Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting prepares the memory card for use with the system. Note that if you  
erase the contents of a memory card it must be re-formatted.  
1. Insert a formatted memory card in the memory card slot in the processor unit.  
2. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
3. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select PRESET, MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
5. Select MEMORY CARD and press the [MENU] key.  
6. Use the trackball to select FORMAT and press the [MENU] key.  
The message “FORMAT MEMORY CARD. THE FILES SAVED IN CARD  
WILL BE DELETED” appears.  
7. Select FORMAT to format (or CANCEL to escape) and press the [MENU]  
key.  
8. Select QUIT and press the [MENU] key.  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE,  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping the equipment in good  
working order.  
WARNING  
Do not open the equipment.  
Hazardous voltage which can  
cause electrical shock exists  
inside the equipment. Only  
qualified personnel should  
work inside the equipment.  
11.1 Preventive Maintenance  
Check the following points monthly.  
Check all cables. If damaged, replace.  
Check connectors at rear of each unit. If loosened, reconnect.  
Check earth of each unit. Clean if necessary.  
Check voltage of ship’s mains to be sure it is within the equipment’s power  
rating.  
Cleaning the equipment  
Dust or dirt can be removed from the equipment with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use  
chemical cleaners to clean the equipment – they can remove paint and  
markings.  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.2 Hull Unit Maintenance  
Follow the points mentioned below to keep the hull unit in good working order.  
Apply MOLYTONE grease  
#2 every six months.  
Raise transducer and coat main  
shaft with Daphne Eponex Grease  
No.2 (IDEMITSU KOSAN CO.,LTD.)*1  
every six months.  
Dry dock ship and clean  
transducer face yearly.  
Apply single coat of  
"MARINE STAR 20 Mod  
(Red-N)" anti-foulant to  
transducer face to keep  
marine life off the transducer.  
Hull unit maintenance  
*1: Equivalent greases:  
SHOWA SHELL OIL: Shell Albania Grease S No.2  
EXXON MOBIL: Mobilux EP No.2  
NIPPON OIL CORPORATION: Multinox Grease No. 2  
CAUTION  
Replace anticorrosion zinc plate yearly.  
Corrosion between the main shaft and  
transducer may result, allowing water leakage  
and/or loss of transducer.  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.3 Fuse Replacement  
The fuses in the processor unit, transceiver unit and hull unit protect them from  
overcurrent and equipment fault. If the power cannot be applied, first check the  
fuse in the processor unit and transceiver unit. If the power still cannot be turned  
on, have a qualified technician check the fuses in other units.  
Unit and fuse  
Unit  
Fuse rating  
Processor unit  
Transceiver unit  
FGB0 10 A 250 VAC (2 pcs.)  
FGB0 20 A 250 VAC (2 pcs.)  
For 100/110/115 VAC  
FGB0 10 A 250 VAC (2 pcs.)  
For 220/230 VAC  
Transceiver unit (B voltage power  
section)*  
FGBO 15 A 250 VAC (2 pcs.)  
Transceiver unit (DC power section)*  
Hull unit*  
FGMB 5 A 250 VAC (2 pcs.)  
FGMB 2 A 250 VAC (1 pc.)  
* Fuse cannot be replaced by operator.  
WARNING  
Use the proper fuse.  
Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or  
damage the equipment.  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.4 Troubleshooting  
The table below provides common symptoms of equipment troubles and the  
means to rectify them.  
Troubleshooting  
Check, Remedy  
Symptom  
Cannot turn on  
the power.  
Check cables between transceiver unit, processor unit and  
monitor unit.  
Check ship’s mains.  
Have a suitably qualified technician check the fuse in the  
transceiver unit.  
Bottom echo  
becomes  
irregular.  
Rough seas. Distance to the bottom changes due to rolling  
and pitching.  
Long range selected. Transmission period is longer so ship’s  
pitching and rolling are apt to affect detection of echo.  
Weak echo  
Output power set to minimum. Set to maximum, on the  
H-SCAN SETTING menu.  
Excessive TVG. Readjust TVG on the appropriate menu  
(H-SCAN SETTING, V-SCAN SETTING). Note that  
readjustment of TVG is necessary when gain is adjusted.  
Somewhat  
strange color  
Brilliance setting too low. Increase brightness with the  
[BRILLIANCE] control.  
Picture contains  
noise.  
Equipment not grounded properly. Check equipment ground.  
Power cable is too close to the signal cable. Relocate power  
cable or signal cable.  
Debris may be on sea surface. Reject unwanted noise with  
the interference rejector on the appropriate menu among  
H-SCAN SETTING, V-SCAN SETTING.  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.5 Warning Messages  
The table below shows the warning messages which may appear on the display.  
All warning messages are accompanied by an audio alarm, which you may  
silence with the [R/B AUDIO] key.  
Error messages  
Message  
Meaning, Remedy  
Power supply  
OVERVOLTAGE!!  
This message blinks at the screen center and  
the buzzer sounds when the voltage supplied  
to the transceiver unit is excessive.  
Transmission is stopped if the equipment is  
transmitting, to protect the transducer and  
transmitter power section from damage.  
Silence the buzzer with the [R/B AUDIO] key,  
retract the transducer and turn off the power.  
Have a qualified technician check input  
voltage.  
RETRACT TRANSDUCER AND TURN OFF  
POWER. CHECK SHIP’S MAINS VOLTAGE.  
PRESS [R/B] KEY TO TURN OFF ALARM.  
Transceiver unit  
NO RESPONSE FROM TRANSCEIVER  
UNIT.  
TURN OFF AND ON POWER AGAIN, OR  
CHECK POWER LINE TO TRANSCEIVER  
UNIT. PRESS [R/B] KEY TO TURN OFF  
ALARM.  
This message blinks at the screen center and  
the buzzer sounds when there is no reply  
from the transceiver unit. Press the [R/B  
AUDIO] key to turn off the buzzer. Have a  
qualified technician check the set.  
ELECTRIC CHARGE!!  
This message blinks at the screen center and  
the buzzer sounds if the +B voltage of  
capacitors in the transceiver unit can not be  
charged to predetermined voltage within the  
specified time. Press the [R/B AUDIO] key to  
silence the buzzer. Have a qualified  
RETRACT TRANSDUCER AND TURN OFF  
POWER. CHECK SHIP’S MAINS VOLTAGE.  
PRESS R/B KEY TO TURN OFF ALARM.  
technician check the set.  
OVER TEMPERATURE!!  
RETRACT TRANSDUCER AND TURN OFF  
POWER.  
This message blinks at the screen center and  
the buzzer sounds when the temperature in  
the power supply block has exceeded 85°C.  
Press the [R/B AUDIO] key to silence the  
buzzer. Turn off the unit and have a qualified  
technician check the set.  
PRESS R-B KEY TO TURN OFF ALARM.  
Hull unit, transducer  
TRANSDUCER NOT RETRACTED!!  
This message blinks at the screen center, the  
CUT OFF POWER LINE TO MONITOR UNIT buzzer sounds and the LEDs above keys  
AND HULL UNIT. PRESS [R/B] KEY TO  
TURN OFF ALARM.  
blink if the transducer is not raised within 26  
seconds for 800 mm stroke or 33 seconds for  
1100 mm stroke of pressing the [↑] key.  
Press the [R/B AUDIO] key to silence the  
buzzer. The reason may be the transducer is  
tangled in the net or its shaft is bent. Try  
raising it from the hull unit as shown in  
section 11.9.  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
Error messages (con’t from previous page)  
Message  
Meaning, Remedy  
Hull unit, transducer (con’t)  
WARNING!!  
This message blinks at the screen center and  
the buzzer sounds when the transducer is  
knocked out of position in any aspect of its  
operation. Try to return the transducer to its  
normal position by operating the [↑] or [↓]  
key and silence the buzzer with the [R/B  
AUDIO] key.  
TRANSDUCER IS KEPT AT WRONG  
POSITION. SET BACK TRANSDUCER  
POSITION TO NORMAL BY USING OR ↓  
KEY. PRESS [R/B] KEY TO TURN OFF  
ALARM.  
WARNING!!  
This message blinks at the screen center and  
the buzzer sounds when the transducer is  
extended and ship’s speed, input by external  
equipment, exceeds 18 kts. Silence the  
buzzer with the [R/B AUDIO] key and lower  
ship’s speed.  
TRANSDUCER IS KEPT EXTENDED. MAX  
ALLOWABLE SPEED FOR EXTENDED  
TRANSDUCER IS 18 KT. PRESS [R/B] KEY  
TO TURN OFF ALARM.  
WARNING!!  
This message blinks at the screen center and  
the buzzer sounds when the transducer is  
raised/lowered and ship’s speed, input by  
external equipment, exceeds 15 kts. Silence  
the buzzer with the [R/B AUDIO] key and  
lower ship’s speed.  
MAX ALLOWABLE SPEED DURING  
RAISING/LOWERING TRANSDUCER IS 15  
KT. PRESS [R/B] KEY TO TURN OFF  
ALARM.  
11.6 Error Codes  
The equipment displays a (blinking) three-digit error code at the bottom of the  
display when it detects internal trouble. In case of multiple error, error codes  
appear in numerical order and the maximum number of codes displayable is five.  
The codes remain on the screen until the corresponding trouble is fixed, and a  
buzzer sounds each time a new error code is added to the on-screen error code  
display. For any error code, report error code number to your dealer.  
* * * Error Code * * *  
#003, #006, #108  
Error code  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.7 Status Messages  
Status messages appear at the screen center to alert the operator. These are as  
below.  
Status messages and their meanings  
Status message  
Meaning  
TX OFF  
Transmission turned off from the menu.  
RAISE/LOWER  
TEST*  
Raise/lower command received from the control unit in  
normal operation, to manually test raise/lower switch in hull  
unit. Raise/lower keys on the control unit are inoperative  
during the hull unit test.  
* = Not displayed when TX is OFF.  
11.8 Tests  
A comprehensive diagnostic facility is provided for testing the equipment. If NG  
(no good) or abnormal display appears in the test results for any test, contact  
your dealer.  
11.8.1 TEST menu  
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.  
2. Select OTHERS and press the [MENU] key.  
3. Select INITIAL SETTING and press the [MENU] key.  
4. Select TEST and press the [MENU] key to open the TEST menu.  
MENU  
OTHERS  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
QUIT  
INITIAL SETTING  
TEST  
BOARD TEST...  
: EXECUTE  
PANEL TEST...  
TEST PATTERN...  
RX TEST...  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
: EXECUTE  
: OFF  
NOISE TEST...  
TX  
TEST menu  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.8.2 Board test  
Select BOARD TEST from the TEST menu and press the [MENU] key to do this  
test.  
TRX Board update no.  
(From left TRX1)  
Program No.  
BOARD TEST  
DCON-0  
105-0788-XX.XX  
00 00  
TRCPU-0  
105-0790-XX.XX  
00 00  
105-0791-XX.XX  
ROM = OK  
EEPROM = OK  
RAM = OK  
VRAM = OK  
DPRAM1 = OK  
DPRAM2 = OK  
DPRAM on  
DUAL board  
+3.3V = 3.2V  
+12V = 12.1V  
ROM = OK  
RAM = OK  
TDS = OK  
-12V =  
-11.9V  
DPRAM on  
IFES board  
140V = 138.6V  
TRX  
0 0 0 0 0 F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
DUAL-X  
105-0789-XX.XX  
00  
00  
ROM = OK  
RAM = OK  
VRAM = OK  
DPRAM = OK  
DATA = OK  
BMF-0  
DATA = OK  
00 00 00 00  
Board name,  
revision no.  
RDS1 = OK  
RDS 2 = OK  
FDS1 = OK  
FDS2 = OK  
DIP switch  
setting  
SCAN-0  
SCAN2-0  
IFES-0  
105-0796-XX.XX  
ROM = OK  
RAM = OK  
VRAM = OK  
DPRAM = OK  
DATA = OK  
PWR  
INC  
12V = 12.3V  
+B = 120.8V  
Memory, data  
test results  
TEST = OK  
Pitch = +12.3  
Roll = - 2.5  
KEY1-0  
KEY2-0  
105-0685-1XX  
00  
00  
ROM = OK  
RAM = OK  
Motion sensor test results  
105-0685-1XX  
TD  
TEMP = 76.4°C  
ROM = OK  
RAM = OK  
For No.2  
control unit  
Transducer temperature  
(Press OFFCENTER key to display.)  
PRESS MENU KEY TO QUIT TEST MODE.  
XX: Version No.  
OK: Normal  
NG: Abnormal  
Board test results  
For any NG, contact your dealer for advice.  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
Interpreting the board test results  
Board name and its revision no. are shown in white. If a board is not  
inserted or inserted improperly “F” is shown as program number. When a  
revision no. is improper a hexadecimal from 0-E appears. When an error is  
found, revision no. and board name appear in red.  
Program no. is shown in white, or red when software finds revision no. error.  
DIP switch setting on each board is shown.  
Memory read/write test results are shown as OK (white) or NG (red).  
Test data check results are shown as OK (white) or NG (red).  
TX +B voltage is measured and displayed.  
Motion sensor test results show OK (white) or NG (red) as overall results  
and pitch and roll angles.  
KEY 2-0 will be displayed only when two control units are installed.  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.8.3 Panel test  
This test checks the keys, controls and trackball of the control unit. Select  
PANEL TEST from the TEST menu and press the [MENU] key to do this test.  
PANEL TEST  
1
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X = 0  
Y = 0  
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X = 0  
Y = 0  
0
0
0
0
PRESS MENU KEY TO QUIT TEST MODE.  
PANEL test  
Key check:  
Press each key one by one. A key is normal if its  
corresponding on-screen location shows “1” while the key is  
pressed and “0” when the key is released. The power keys  
(ON and OFF) can not be checked.  
Control check: Operate each control one by one. A control is normal if  
rotating clockwise indicates positive, and counterclockwise,  
negative. The [BRILLIANCE] control, [AUDIO] control and the  
[POWER] switches cannot be checked.  
*: When two control units are connected, 1 is for main control unit and 2 is for  
sub control unit.  
Trackball check: Operate the trackball. X-Y coordinates of trackball position  
are displayed. Normal conditions are as follows.  
Rightward:  
Leftward:  
Upward:  
X positive  
X negative  
Y positive  
Y negative  
Downward:  
Lever check:  
Press the lever upward or downward. Normal conditions  
are 1 for upward and 2 for downward.  
11-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.8.4 Test pattern  
This test checks for proper display of colors and brilliance. Select TEST  
PATTERN from the TEST menu and press the [MENU] key to do this test. Use  
the [MODE] key to change the test pattern.  
PRESS MENU KEY TO QUIT TEST MODE.  
PRESS MODE KEY TO CHANGE TEST PATTERN.  
White  
BLACK  
RED  
GREEN  
BLUE  
Black  
Test patterns  
11-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.8.5 Rx test (For service technician)  
This test inputs dummy data to each board and each board outputs a test  
pattern (32 color). Select RX TEST from the TEST menu and press the [MENU]  
key to do this test. Select the board to test with the [MODE] key, in the sequence  
shown below.  
Horizontal display  
SCAN-H TEST  
<<CHECKING RX >>  
PRESS MENU KEY TO QUIT TEST MODE.  
MODE : CHANGE DISP MODE.  
Horizontal display  
Vertical display  
SCAN-H&V TEST  
This message appears while the Rx test is  
being conducted.  
SCAN2-H TEST  
SCAN2-H & V TEST  
DUAL TEST  
Horizontal 2 display  
Vertical display  
History display  
Echo Sounder display  
IFES TEST  
Horizontal combination dislpay  
BMFTEST  
Rx test sequence, Rx test message  
11.8.6 Noise test (For service technician)  
This test measures noise level. Select NOISE TEST from the TEST menu and  
press the [MENU] key to conduct this test. The following message appears on  
the display while the test is being conducted. Use the [GAIN] control to adjust  
noise level to medium.  
<< NOISE TEST >>  
PRESS MENU KEY TO QUIT TEST MODE.  
ADJUST NOISE LEVEL TO MEDIUM BY GAIN KNOB.  
Noise test message  
11-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.9 Raising the Transducer from the Hull Unit  
If the transducer cannot be raised with the switches on the control unit, because  
it is tangled in the net or its shaft is bent, try to raise it from the hull unit,  
automatically or manually, whichever works.  
11.9.1 Raising the transducer automatically  
1. Turn off the monitor unit, transceiver unit and hull unit from the ship’s mains  
breaker. (If the transducer cannot be retracted power cannot be turned off  
from the monitor unit.)  
2. Check if the net or other object is caught in the transducer.  
3. Look through the lid on the raise/lower control box in the hull unit to check if  
the motor breaker is OFF. If it is midway between ON and OFF, open the lid  
and turn it off and then on.  
4. Unfasten six screws to remove the cover of the raise/lower control box.  
5. Push the RESET button (green) on the raise/lower control box.  
6. Close the cover.  
7. Turn on the breaker at the ship’s mains.  
8. Turn on the equipment from the control unit.  
9. Press the [ ] key on the control unit to raise the transducer.  
If the transducer cannot be raised, the shaft may be bent. In this case raise it  
manually with the hand crank, following the instructions on the next page.  
Power  
Lamp  
Motor  
Breaker  
Reset  
Button  
(green)  
Raise/lower control box, cover removed  
11-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING  
11.9.2 Raising the transducer manually  
1. Open the lid on the raise/lower control box of the hull unit and turn off the  
motor breaker. Confirm that the power lamp is off. (See the illustration on the  
previous page for location of motor breaker and power lamp.)  
2. Unscrew two screws to remove the cover.  
3. Attach the ratchet wrench to the motor shaft, referring to the illustration  
below.  
Ratchet wrench  
Lower  
Raise  
Motor  
4. While holding the ratchet wrench, pull the release lever toward you and  
upward to release the brake.  
Holder  
Release lever  
DOWN  
Note: Hold the ratchet wrench when releasing the brake, to prevent the  
transducer from falling out.  
5. Turn the ratchet wrench clockwise to raise the transducer.  
6. After retracting the transducer into the tank, set the release lever to the  
holder as shown below.  
Push release lever  
into holder.  
11-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MENU TREE  
MENU key  
TX INTERVAL (0-9, 9) *1, *2  
TX PULSE LENGTH (0-9, 7) *1, *2  
TX POWER (0-9, 9) *1, *2  
TX PULSE LENGTH-H  
TX POWER-H  
TVG-NEAR-H  
COLOR (COLOR 1-4, 2) *1, *2  
COLOR SETTING...  
(Sets echo level of colors.)  
COLOR RESPONSE  
(COLOR CURVE 1-4, 3) *1, *2  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
TVG-NEAR (-5 - 5, 5) *1, *2  
TVG-MEDIUM (-5 - 5, 4) *1, *2  
TVG-FAR (-5 - 5, 2) *1, *2  
NOISE LIMITER (0-15, 7) *1, *2  
REVERBERATION (0-3, 0) *1, *2  
SIDELOBE SUPPRESS (-3 - 3.0, 3)  
AGC (0-9, 0) *1, *2  
TVG-MEDIUM-H  
Default  
TVG-FAR-H  
user  
AGC-H  
menu  
2ND AGC-H  
ECHO AVERAGE-H  
COLOR-H  
(Sets color response curve.)  
GAIN OFFSET (0-12, 5) *1, *2  
SIGNAL LEVEL (0-15, 3) *1, *2  
FAR TVG CURVE (TVG1-4, 3) *1, *2  
ABSORPTION COEFF (0.0dB-32.0dB, 23.5dB)  
TVG DISTANCE... (Sets TVG curve.)  
2ND AGC DISTANCE (0-2000m, 60m)*1  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE (20-300m, 100m)*1  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG (0-3, 2) *1, *2  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR (0-3, 0) *1, *2  
GAIN CONTROL (NORMAL, WIDE)  
BEAMWIDTH...  
2ND AGC (0-12, 4) *1, *2  
COLOR RESPONSE-H  
H-SCAN SETTING...*2, *3  
V-SCAN SETTING...*2  
OTHERS... *2  
NEAR AGC (1-10, 2) *1, *2  
ECHO AVERAGE (0-7, 2) *1, *2  
INT REJECT (0-3, 0) *1, *2  
BOTTOM SUPRESS (0-10, 0) *1, *2  
FREQ SHIFT (-65-+65, 0) *1, *2  
FREQ/BEARING SET (0-358, 0)*1, *2  
OTHERS *2  
(See next page.)  
Default settings in bold  
italic.  
BEAMWIDTH A (AR, -4 to +5, 5) *1, *2  
BEAMWIDTH B (0-5, 0) *1, *2  
TX PULSE LENGTH (0-9, 7) *1, *2  
TX POWER (0-9, 9)  
TVG-NEAR (-5 - 5, 5) *1, *2  
TVG-MEDIUM (-5 - 5, 4) *1, *2  
TVG-FAR (-5 - 5, 2) *1, *2  
NOISE LIMITER (0-15, 7) *1, *2  
REVERBERATION (0-3, 0) *1, *2  
SIDELOBE SUPPRESS (0-3, 3)  
AGC (0-9, 0) *1, *2  
COLOR (COLOR 1-4, 2) *1, *2  
COLOR SETTING...  
(Sets echo level of colors.)  
COLOR RESPONSE  
(COLOR CURVE 1-4, 3) *1, *2  
COLOR RESPONSE...  
2ND AGC (0-12, 4) *1, *2  
(Sets color response curve.)  
NEAR AGC (1-10, 2) *1, *2  
ECHO AVERAGE (0-7, 2) *1, *2  
INT REJECT (0-3, 0) *1, *2  
BOTTOM SUPRESS (0-10, 0) *1, *2  
FREQ SHIFT (-65-+65, 0) *1, *2  
OTHERS *2  
GAIN OFFSET (0-12, 5) *1, *2  
SIGNAL LEVEL (0-15, 3) *1, *2  
FAR TVG CURVE (TVG1-4, 3) *1, *2  
ABSORPTION COEFF (0.0dB-32.0dB, 23.5dB)  
TVG DISTANCE... (Sets TVG curve.)  
2ND AGC DISTANCE (0-2000m, 60m)*1  
NEAR AGC DISTANCE (20-300m, 100m)*1  
SMOOTH ECHO RNG (0-3, 2) *1, *2  
SMOOTH ECHO CIR (0-3, 0) *1, *2  
GAIN CONTROL (NORMAL, WIDE)  
BEAMWIDTH...  
*1: Items which can be programmed to the user menu. See page 8-2.  
*2: Items which can be programmed to a function key. See page 8-6.  
*3: S-SCAN SETTING shown when Slant mode is active. Menu items  
are same as in H-SCAN SETTING menu.  
BEAMWIDTH A (0-5, 5) *1, *2  
BEAMWIDTH B (0-5, 0) *1, *2  
DISPLAY POSITION (LEFT, RIGHT) *1, *2  
VERTICAL SIZE (FULL, HALF) *1, *2  
AP-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
OTHERS  
ES1 SETTING... *2  
GAIN (0-10, 5) *1, *2  
RANGE (20-320 m, 160 m) *1, *2  
SHIFT (0-1000 m, 0 m) *1, *2  
CLUTTER (0-10, 0) *1, *2  
SIGNAL LEVEL (0-9, 0) *1, *2  
INT REJECT (OFF, ON) *1, *2  
PICTURE ADVANCE (1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, SPEED SYNC)  
PICT ADVC AT SHOOT (ADV AT SHOOT, SPEED SYNC)  
COLOR SETTING... (Sets echo level of selected color.)  
COLOR RESPONSE... (Sets echo level vs. echo strength.)  
SCALE POSITION (RIGHT, LEFT)  
ES2 SETTING... *2  
GAIN (0-10, 5)  
RANGE (20, 40, 60, 80, 120, 160, 240, 320 m, INTERLOCK) *1, *2  
[RANGE BELOW NET* (20, 40, 60, 80, 120, 160, 240, 320 m)] *1, *2  
SHIFT (0-1000 m, INTERLOCK**, 0 m) *1, *2  
[RANGE UPPER NET* (20, 40, 60, 80, 160, 240, 320 m)] *1, *2  
CLUTTER (0-10, 0) *1, *2  
SIGNAL LEVEL (0-9, 0) *1, *2  
INT REJECT (OFF, ON) *1, *2  
* = Displayed with  
net recorder connection  
PICTURE ADVANCE (1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, SPEED SYNC)  
COLOR SETTING... (Sets echo level of selected color.)  
COLOR RESPONSE... (Sets echo level vs. echo strength.)  
NET RECORDER DISP (DOWN, UP/DOWN)  
NET RECORDER RANGE (80-640 m, 80 m)  
** = INTERLOCK of SHIFT is  
effective if INTERLOCK of  
RANGE is selected.  
ERASE MARKS... *2  
EVENT MARK (Deletes event marks.) *1, *2  
FISH MARK (Deletes fish marks.) *1, *2  
OWN SHIP POS MARK (Deletes own ship position marks.) *1, *2  
SHIP'S TRACK (Deletes ship's track.) *1, *2  
DISPLAY SETTING... *2  
DISPLAY MODE... (H1, S, H1&H2, H&S, V1, V1&V2, V1&ES1, V1&ES2, HISTORY, ES1, ES2, ES1&ES  
MODE SELECTION (MODE KEY, PULL-DOWN MENU)  
TX/RX MODE (ALTERNATIVE, MULTI)  
)
H2/S DISPLAY (LANDSCAPE, PORTRAIT, RIGHT INSET, LEFT INSET) *1, *2  
PRESENTATION MODE (HEAD UP, NORTH UP, COURSE UP, TRUE MOTION) *1, *2  
TM DISPLAY RANGE (1.3R, 1.6 R)  
BEARING REF (SHIP HEADING, NORTH) *2  
TILT LEVER (TILT, TILT&V1)  
S AUTO OFF CENTER (OFF, ON)  
H-SLICE WIDTH (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32)  
H-SLICE PICT ADVC (KP SYNC, SPEED SYNC)  
NET COURSE MARK (ENTER, DELETE) *1, *2  
MANUAL DEGAUSS (Manually degausses screen; supplied monitor only.) *1, *2  
AUTO DEGAUSS (OFF, TIMER, GYRO, INT SENSOR)  
DIMMER (1-10, 10) *1, *2  
KEY BEEP VOLUME (0-7, 5)  
ALARM & AUDIO...*2  
FISH ALARM (OFF, ON)  
ALARM LEVEL (0-30, 16)  
ALARM ZONE... (Sets fish alarm zone.)  
SHIP SPEED ALARM (OFF, ON)  
AUDIO (OFF, ON)  
AUDIO SECTOR (30˚, 60˚, 90˚, 180˚, 330˚)  
REVERBERATION (0-9, 0)  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD... *2  
ASSIGN USER PROG (Programs USER PROG control. Default menu item.)  
CLEAR F-KEY SETTING (Programs function keys.)  
H/S-SCAN RANGE (60-2000 m, Defaults: 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000 (m))  
V-SCAN RANGE(60-2000 m, Defaults: 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000 (m))  
PICTURE SHOT (Stores current picture in memory.) *1, *2  
PICTURE RECALL (Recalls picture in memory.) *1, *2  
MEMORY CARD... (Menu for formatting, saving, replaying menu cards.) *2  
(Continued on next page)  
AP-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
INITIAL SETTING... *2  
MARK DISPLAY... *2  
HEADING MARK (OFF, ON)  
RANGE RINGS (OFF, ON)  
BEARING SCALE (OFF, ON)  
SHIP'S TRACK (OFF, ON)  
DATA ON TRACK (OFF, WATER TEMP, DEPTH)  
NET MOVEMENT PLOT (OFF, ON)  
FISH MARK CONNECT (OFF, ON)  
TARGET VECTOR (OFF, ON)  
FISH TRACK PLOT (OFF, ON)  
FISH HISTOGRAM (OFF, ON)  
MARK SIZE... *2  
TRACKBALL MARK (+SMALL, +LARGE, SMALL, LARGE)  
TARGET LOCK MARK (SMALL, LARGE)  
TARGET VECTOR (SHORT, NORMAL, LONG)  
EVENT MARK (SMALL, LARGE)  
FISH MARK (SMALL, LARGE)  
OWN SHIP POS MARK (SMALL, LARGE)  
OWN SHIP MARK (STANDARD, LARGE, ACTUAL)  
NET SHOOT MARK (SMALL, LARGE)  
ESTIMATE ON SCAN (SMALL, LARGE)  
ESTIMATE ON ES (1/8, 1/4, 1/2)  
CURRENT VECTOR (SHORT, LONG)  
RANGE RINGS (1/2R, 1/4R)  
SHIP'S TRACK MARK (5R, 10R, 20R, 40R)  
DATA DISPLAY... *2  
RANGE&BEARING (OFF, ON)  
CURSOR POSITION (OFF, ON)  
COURSE (32 CMPS, 360˚ TRUE, 360˚ REL, 180˚ REL)  
CURRENT DATA (32 CMPS, 360˚ TRUE, 360˚ REL, 180˚ REL)  
EVENT MARK (32 CMPS, 360˚ TRUE, 360˚ REL, 180˚ REL)  
OTHER MARKS (32 CMPS, 360˚ TRUE, 360˚ REL, 180˚ REL)  
DISTANCE FOR SHOOT (MILE, METER, FEET)  
WATER TEMP (˚C, ˚F)  
CURRENT VEC & WIND... *2  
CURRENT DATA (ABSOLUTE, REL TO LAYER1, REL TO LAYER2, REL TO LAYER3) *2  
ON OWN SHIP MARK (OFF, ON)  
ON SHIP POS MARK (OFF, ON)  
ON NET SHOOT MARK (OFF, ON)  
CURRENT FLOW DIR (TO, FROM)  
WIND (OFF, RELATIVE, ABSOLUTE) *2  
NET SONDE SETTING... *2  
NUMBER OF XMTR (0-10, 3)  
XMTR DISTANCE...  
END OF NET TO S1 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S1 TO S2 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S2 TO S3 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S3 TO S4 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S4 TO S5 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S5 TO S6 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S6 TO S7 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S7 TO S8 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S8 TO S9 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
S9 TO S10 (0-1000 m, 400 m)  
NET LENGTH (500-3000 m, 1800 m)  
DEPTH DISPLAY... (S1-S10, S1-S3)  
(Continued on next page.)  
AP-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
NET SHOOT SETTING... *2  
NET DIAMETER (200-1000 m, 500 m)  
TILT INTERLOCK (OFF, ON)  
NET PLOT CORR-LYR1 (0-100%, 50%)  
NET PLOT CORR-LYR2 (0-100%, 50%)  
NET PLOT CORR-LYR3 (0-100%, 50%)  
TARGET LOCK... *2  
TRACKING METHOD (TARGET MARK, FISH) *1, *2  
TILT INTERLOCK (OFF, TILT, TILT&RANGE)  
MARK INERLOCK (OFF, ESTIMATE MARK, EST&HISTOGRAM)  
TRACKING DATA (HORIZONTAL/SLANT, H&V)  
THRESHOLD (1-30, 16)  
BOTTOM THRESHOLD (0-5, 3)  
TARGET SPEED LIMIT (1-15 kt, 5 kt)  
SMOOTHING (0.0-1.0, 0.5)  
TARGET SPD UPDATE (15sec, 30sec, 45sec, 60sec)  
TARGET LOCK WINDOW (NORMAL, LARGE, LARGEST)  
DIMENSION SETUP (0-100t, 25t/1000m2)  
VOLUME SETUP (0-100t, 25t/1000m3)  
STABILIZATION... *2  
STABILIZATION (OFF, ON)  
PITCH ANGLE COR (-10.0 - +10.0, 0.0)  
ROLL ANGLE COR (-10.0 - +10.0, 0.0)  
SENSOR (STANDARD, GPS GYRO)  
TEST... *2  
BOARD TEST... (Tests circuit boards.)  
PANEL TEST... (Tests control panel.)  
TEST PATTERN... (Displays test patterns.)  
RX TEST... (Checks receiver.)  
NOISE TEST... (Executes noise test.)  
TX (ON, OFF) *1, *2  
INITIALIZATION... *2  
SAVE SHIP'S ORG  
RECALL SHIP'S ORG *1  
SET TO DEFAULT (Restores all default settings.)  
ITEM ATTRIBUTION (NON-CHANGEABLE, CHANGEABLE)  
TIME OFFSET... (Sets time difference between UTC and local time.)  
AP-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FURUNO  
FSV-84  
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE COLOR SCANNING SONAR  
FSV-84  
1
GENERAL  
1.1 Scanning method  
1.2 Frequency  
Continuous scanning beam forming  
80 kHz  
1.3 Range, TX cycle and Pulse-length  
Basic Range  
Range (m)  
Offcenter ‘ON’ Offcenter ‘OFF’  
(m)  
60  
0-60  
0-100  
0-150  
0-200  
0-300  
0-400  
0-500  
0-600  
0-700  
0-800  
0-900  
0-1000  
0-1100  
0-1200  
0-1400  
0-1600  
0-2000  
0-96  
100  
150  
200  
300  
400  
500  
600  
700  
800  
900  
1000  
1100  
1200  
1400  
1600  
2000  
0-160  
0-240  
0-320  
0-480  
0-640  
0-800  
0-960  
0-1120  
0-1280  
0-1440  
0-1600  
0-1760  
0-1920  
0-2240  
0-2560  
0-3200  
1.4 Audio Search  
1.5 Audio Output  
30°, 60°, 90°, 180°, 330°, selectable  
1.1 W (4 ohm)  
1.6 Audio Frequency  
1.0 kHz  
2
DISPLAY UNIT  
2.1 Display Tube  
PPI display on 21-inch high-resolution color CRT (for separate type),  
1280(H) × 1024(V) dots  
2.2 Color  
32 colors (sonar picture), 16 colors (echo sounder), 4 colors (marks)  
Head-up, North-up*, True-motion* and Course-up*  
2.3 Orientation  
2.4 Presentation Mode  
Horizontal, Sonar, Horizontal 2, S-scan, S-scan combination, Vertical  
1, Vertical 2, Vertical scan 1 + Echo sounder, History, Echo sounder  
1, Echo sounder 2, Echo sounder 1 + Echo sounder 2  
SP - 1  
E1329S01B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FURUNO  
FSV-84  
2.5 Features  
Custom mode, interference rejector, afterglow, noise limiter,  
color erasure, memory card (save and recall of picture, setting data),  
automatic tilt, automatic target tracking* (target lock), fish alarm,  
over-voltage warning, unretracted transducer warning  
*: Appropriate sensor required  
3
TRANSCEIVER UNIT  
3.1 Transmitter  
PDM half-bridge  
3.2 Receiving method  
3.3 Horizontal Tx Beamwidth  
3.4 Horizontal Rx Beamwidth  
3.5 Tilt Angle  
Straight amplifier, full digital beam forming  
Horizontal 360° × Vertical 10.7° (-6 dB full width)  
Horizontal 12.6° ×Vertical 10.1° (-6 dB, full width)  
-5° to 90°  
3.6 Vertical Tx Beamwidth  
3.7 Vertical Rx Beamwidth  
3.8 Vertical Search Range  
3.9 S Tx Beamwidth  
3.10 S RX Beam width  
3.11 Tilt Angle  
Horizontal 12.7° × Vertical 118.2° (-6 dB, full width)  
Horizontal 12.6° × Vertical 12.1° (-6 dB, full width)  
0° to 90°  
Horizontal 206.7° × Vertical 12.1° (-6 dB, full width)  
Horizontal 12.6° × Vertical 12.0° (-6 dB, full width)  
-5° to 90°  
4
HULL UNIT  
Type  
FSV-8432  
FSV-8442  
XDCR travel  
500/800 mm  
21 sec  
800/1100 mm  
28 sec  
Raise/Lower Time  
Allowable ship’s speed  
(Raise/lower operation)  
18 knots  
15 knots  
(18 knots)  
(15 knots)  
5
DATA IO  
5.1 Input (NMEA 0183)  
CUR, DBS, DBT, DPT, GGA, GLL, HCC, HCD, HDG, HDM, HDT,  
MTW, MWV, RMA, RMC, VBW, VDR, VHW, VTG, VWT, ZDA, GNS  
System clock, position, speed, bearing, first layer current data, water  
depth, water temperature, multi-layer current data, net depth, wind  
5.2 CIF Input Data  
5.3 Output (NMEA 0183)  
TLL  
SP - 2  
E1329S01B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FURUNO  
FSV-84  
6
POWER SUPPLY  
6.1 Processor Unit, Control Unit, Display Unit  
100-115/200-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 5 A  
Processor Unit, Control Unit  
100-115/200-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 2 A  
6.2 Transceiver Unit  
6.3 Hull Unit  
100/110/115/200/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 15 A  
200-220 VAC, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz, 4 A  
7
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS  
7.1 Ambient Temperature  
Transducer:  
-5°C to +35°C  
0°C to +50°C  
95% at 40°C  
Other units:  
7.2 Relative Humidity  
7.3 Vibration  
IEC 60945 4 ed.  
7.4 Waterproofing (IEC 60529)  
Display Unit:  
Control Unit:  
Transceiver Unit  
Hull Unit:  
No protection (IEC: IPX0) Display panel: IPX2  
No protection (IEC: IPX0) Panel: IPX2  
No protection (IEC: IPX0)  
Burstproof (IEC: IPX2)  
IPX8  
Transducer:  
8
COATING COLOR  
8.1 Display Unit  
8.2 Processor Unit  
8.3 Control Unit  
8.4 Transceiver Unit  
8.5 Hull Unit  
2.5GY5/1.5  
2.5GY5/1.5  
Panel: N3.0, No.535  
2.5G7/2  
2.5G7/2  
SP - 3  
E1329S01B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Bearing scale..........................................9-7  
Board test............................................. 11-8  
Bottom suppression  
A
Absorption coefficient  
horizontal mode................................ 2-49  
slant mode........................................ 4-42  
vertical mode .................................... 3-18  
AGC  
horizontal mode ................................2-23  
slant mode........................................4-20  
vertical mode ....................................3-14  
BRILLIANCE control...............................1-3  
2nd AGC distance, horizontal mode ... 2-50  
2nd AGC distance, slant mode........... 4-43  
2nd AGC distance, vertical mode ....... 3-19  
2nd AGC, horizontal mode ................. 2-18  
2nd AGC, slant mode......................... 4-15  
2nd AGC, vertical mode ..................... 3-11  
adjustment, horizontal mode............. 2-17  
adjustment, slant mode..................... 4-14  
adjustment, vertical mode................. 3-10  
near AGC distance, horizontal mode. 2-50  
near AGC distance, slant mode ........ 4-43  
near AGC distance, vertical mode..... 3-19  
near AGC, horizontal mode............... 2-19  
near AGC, slant mode ...................... 4-16  
near AGC, vertical mode................... 3-11  
ALARM & AUDIO menu.......................... 9-4  
AUDIO control............................. 2-30, 4-26  
Audio function  
C
Cleaning............................................... 11-1  
Clutter...................................................5-15  
Color  
horizontal mode ................................2-48  
slant mode........................................4-41  
vertical mode ....................................3-18  
Color response  
horizontal mode ................................2-48  
slant mode........................................4-41  
vertical mode ....................................3-18  
Color response curve  
echo sounder mode ..........................5-15  
horizontal mode ................................2-49  
slant mode........................................4-42  
vertical mode ....................................3-18  
Control description..................................1-1  
Control unit.............................................1-1  
Course format....................................... 9-11  
Course-up mode...................................2-33  
Current data  
flow direction.....................................9-12  
format ...............................................9-12  
indication .......................................... 9-11  
Current mark  
horizontal mode................................ 2-30  
slant mode........................................ 4-26  
AUTO TILT key................................2-9, 4-9  
AUTO TRAIN key................................. 2-32  
Automatic tilt  
horizontal mode.................................. 2-9  
slant mode.......................................... 4-9  
Automatic training  
horizontal mode................................ 2-32  
slant mode........................................ 4-11  
on net shoot mark.............................9-12  
on own ship position mark.................9-12  
CURRENT VEC & WIND menu ............9-12  
Current vector size ...............................9-10  
Cursor position ..................................... 9-11  
B
Beamwidth  
horizontal mode................................ 2-25  
slant mode........................................ 4-21  
vertical mode .................................... 3-15  
Bearing  
horizontal mode, measuring.............. 2-14  
slant mode, measuring ..................... 4-11  
Bearing mode......................................... 9-3  
D
Defaults ................................................9-16  
Degauss.................................................9-3  
DELETE MARK key...2-40, 2-42, 4-34, 4-36  
Depth measurement.............................5-12  
DISPLAY SETTING menu ......................9-2  
IN-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Distance measurement .........................5-12  
Function keys  
erasing programs ............................... 8-7  
executing functions............................. 8-4  
programming...................................... 8-6  
Fuse replacement .................................11-3  
E
Echo average  
horizontal mode.................................2-23  
slant mode ........................................4-20  
vertical mode.....................................3-13  
ERASE MARKS menu............................9-1  
Error codes...........................................11-6  
Error messages.....................................11-5  
ES1 SETTING menu.............................5-15  
ES2 SETTING menu.............................5-16  
ESTIMATE key.............................2-38, 4-32  
Estimate marks  
G
Gain  
echo sounder mode.......................... 5-10  
horizontal, slant and vertical modes.. 1-13  
GAIN control ........................................ 1-13  
Gain control curve  
horizontal mode................................ 2-50  
slant mode........................................ 4-43  
Gain offset  
horizontal mode................................ 2-49  
slant mode........................................ 4-42  
vertical mode.................................... 3-18  
Graphic display  
echo sounder mode...........................5-13  
horizontal mode.................................2-38  
slant mode ........................................4-32  
EVENT key ..................................2-41, 4-35  
Event marks  
format................................................9-11  
horizontal mode, deleting from menu.2-43  
horizontal mode, deleting with  
abbreviated......................................... 7-2  
full ...................................................... 7-1  
H
DELETE MARK key.......................2-42  
horizontal mode, entering..................2-41  
size ...................................................9-10  
slant mode, deleting from menu ........4-37  
slant mode, deleting with  
Heading mark......................................... 9-7  
Head-up mode ..................................... 2-33  
History marker  
description.......................................... 6-4  
width................................................... 6-5  
History mode  
DELETE MARK key.......................4-36  
slant mode, entering..........................4-35  
history marker width ........................... 6-5  
interpreting ......................................... 6-3  
picture advance mode ........................ 6-6  
sample display.................................... 6-2  
H-slice  
picture advance.................................. 9-3  
width................................................... 9-3  
HSV key.......................... 1-13, 2-7, 3-6, 4-7  
Hull unit maintenance............................11-2  
F
F1-F6 keys..............................................8-4  
Fish alarm  
horizontal mode.................................2-35  
slant mode ........................................4-30  
Fish histogram ......................................5-14  
FISH key......................................2-39, 4-33  
Fish marks  
connection of.......................................9-8  
horizontal mode, deleting ..................2-40  
horizontal mode, entering..................2-39  
size ...................................................9-10  
slant mode, deleting..........................4-34  
slant mode, entering..........................4-33  
track plot .............................................9-9  
Freq/bearing setting  
I
Indications  
echo sounder mode............................ 5-2  
horizontal mode.................................. 2-2  
slant mode.......................................... 4-2  
vertical mode...................................... 3-3  
INITIAL SETTING menu......................... 9-6  
INITIALIZATION menu ......................... 9-16  
Interference rejector  
horizontal mode.................................2-23  
echo sounder mode.......................... 5-15  
horizontal mode................................ 2-21  
IN-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
slant mode........................................ 4-18  
vertical mode .................................... 3-12  
O
OFF CENTER key.......................2-37, 4-28  
Offcentering  
K
automatic, slant mode.......................4-29  
manual, horizontal mode...................2-37  
manual, slant mode...........................4-28  
OTHERS menu.......................................9-1  
horizontal mode ................................2-47  
slant mode........................................4-40  
vertical mode ....................................3-17  
Own ship mark size ..............................9-10  
Own ship position marks  
Key beep volume.................................... 9-3  
M
MAIN menu ..........................................1-14  
Maintenance  
cleaning............................................ 11-1  
fuse replacement.............................. 11-3  
hull unit............................................. 11-2  
preventive......................................... 11-1  
MARK DISPLAY menu ........................... 9-6  
MARK SIZE menu.................................. 9-9  
Marks  
echo sounder mode............................ 5-2  
horizontal mode.................................. 2-2  
slant mode.......................................... 4-2  
vertical mode ...................................... 3-3  
Memory cards  
horizontal mode, deleting from menu 2-43  
horizontal mode, deleting with  
DELETE MARK key ......................2-42  
horizontal mode, entering..................2-42  
size...................................................9-10  
slant mode, deleting from menu........4-37  
slant mode, deleting with  
DELETE MARK key ......................4-36  
slant mode, entering .........................4-36  
file recalling....................................... 10-3  
formatting ......................................... 10-4  
image and configuration.................... 10-1  
MENU key............................................ 1-14  
Menu tree.................................................. 1  
MODE key.............................................. 1-6  
P
Panel dimmer .........................................1-4  
Panel test ........................................... 11-10  
Picture advance speed  
at shooting of net ..............................5-15  
normal operation............................... 5-11  
Picture recall.........................................2-46  
Picture shot ..........................................2-46  
Pitch angle............................................9-15  
POWER switches ...................................1-2  
Presentation mode................................2-33  
PRESET, MEMORY CARD menu...........9-5  
Pulse length  
N
Net course mark  
horizontal mode................................ 2-44  
slant mode........................................ 4-38  
Net diameter.........................................9-14  
Net length............................................. 9-13  
Net movement plot ................................. 9-8  
Net plot correlation ............................... 9-14  
Net shoot distance unit......................... 9-11  
Net shoot mark  
horizontal mode ................................2-18  
slant mode........................................4-15  
vertical mode ....................................3-10  
horizontal mode................................ 2-45  
size................................................... 9-10  
slant mode........................................ 4-39  
NET SHOOTING menu ........................ 9-14  
NET SONDE SETTING menu .............. 9-13  
Noise limiter  
R
R/B AUDIO key............................2-30, 4-26  
Range  
echo sounder mode ............................5-8  
echo sounder mode, presetting...........5-8  
horizontal and slant modes, presetting9-5  
horizontal mode, measuring..............2-14  
slant mode, measuring...................... 4-11  
vertical mode, measuring....................3-6  
vertical mode, presetting.....................9-5  
horizontal mode................................ 2-23  
slant mode........................................ 4-20  
vertical mode .................................... 3-13  
Noise test........................................... 11-12  
North-up mode .....................................2-33  
IN-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Range and bearing data........................9-11  
RANGE control  
horizontal mode...................................2-7  
slant mode ..........................................4-7  
vertical mode.......................................3-6  
Range rings  
vector ........................................ 9-9, 9-10  
TARGET LOCK key... 2-27, 2-28, 4-23, 4-24  
TARGET LOCK menu ................. 2-29, 4-25  
TEST menu...........................................11-7  
Test pattern .........................................11-11  
Tests  
interval ..............................................9-10  
on/off...................................................9-7  
Reverberation  
board test ..........................................11-8  
noise test.........................................11-12  
panel test.........................................11-10  
Rx test.............................................11-12  
test menu ..........................................11-7  
test pattern ......................................11-11  
Tilt angle  
horizontal mode........................2-23, 2-32  
slant mode ...............................4-20, 4-27  
vertical mode.....................................3-13  
Rolling angle.........................................9-15  
Rx test ................................................11-12  
horizontal mode.................................. 2-8  
slant mode.......................................... 4-8  
TILT control  
function preset.................................... 9-3  
horizontal mode.................................. 2-8  
slant mode.......................................... 4-8  
Tilt interlock (net shooting) ................... 9-14  
Time offset ........................................... 9-16  
Track  
S
Scale position (echo sounder mode).....5-15  
SHOOT key .................................2-45, 4-39  
Sidelobe suppression  
horizontal mode.................................2-24  
slant mode ........................................4-20  
vertical mode.....................................3-14  
Signal level  
amount to display ............................. 9-10  
data on ............................................... 9-8  
description.......................................... 9-7  
erasing ............................................... 9-1  
Trackball mark position reference  
mark............................................ 3-5, 5-2  
Trackball mark size ................................ 9-9  
Transducer  
echo sounder mode...........................5-15  
horizontal mode.................................2-49  
slant mode ........................................4-42  
vertical mode.....................................3-18  
Smoothing  
circular, horizontal mode....................2-50  
circular, slant mode ...........................4-43  
circular, vertical mode........................3-19  
range, horizontal mode......................2-50  
range, slant mode .............................4-43  
range, vertical mode..........................3-19  
Sonde depth data..................................9-14  
STABILIZATION menu..........................9-15  
Start-up test ........................................11-12  
Status messages...................................11-7  
System configuration ...............................xiii  
lowering, raising from display unit....... 1-3  
raising automatically from raise/lower  
control box...................................11-13  
raising manually from raise/lower  
control box...................................11-14  
Transducer switches ....................... 1-2, 1-3  
Transmitter  
distances.......................................... 9-13  
number of......................................... 9-13  
Troubleshooting ....................................11-4  
True motion mode  
T
Target lock  
fish school mode, horizontal mode ....2-27  
fish school mode, slant mode............4-23  
mark size.............................................9-9  
position mode, horizontal mode.........2-28  
position mode, slant mode.................4-24  
type, horizontal mode........................2-26  
type, slant mode................................4-22  
description........................................ 2-33  
display range...................................... 9-3  
TVG  
adjustment, horizontal mode............. 2-15  
adjustment, slant mode .................... 4-12  
adjustment, vertical mode................... 3-7  
far TVG curve, horizontal mode........ 2-49  
IN-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
far TVG curve, vertical mode ............ 3-18  
TVG distance, horizontal mode......... 2-50  
TVG distance, slant mode................. 4-43  
TVG distance, vertical mode............. 3-19  
Tx frequency  
horizontal mode................................ 2-22  
vertical mode.................................... 3-13  
slant mode........................................ 4-19  
Tx interval  
horizontal mode................................ 2-22  
slant mode........................................ 4-19  
Tx power  
horizontal mode................................ 2-20  
slant mode........................................ 4-17  
Tx/Rx mode............................................ 9-2  
U
User menu  
deleting items from ............................. 8-1  
programming ......................................8-2  
USER PROG control  
programming ......................................8-8  
user program selection ....................... 8-8  
V
V1/S, V2 keys................................ 3-5, 3-16  
Vertical bearing mark.............................. 3-4  
Vertical display position ........................ 3-19  
Vertical expansion display .................... 3-16  
Vertical size (vertical mode)..................3-20  
W
Warning messages............................... 11-5  
Water temperature unit......................... 9-11  
Wind data............................................. 9-12  
IN-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Eiki Projector EIP 250 User Manual
Electro Voice Microphone CL 1 User Manual
Electro Voice Portable Speaker SP12 User Manual
Estate Dishwasher TUD4700 User Manual
Extron electronic Switch CC AAP Series User Manual
First Alert Home Security System FA145C User Manual
Frigidaire Microwave Oven FFMO1611LB User Manual
FujiFilm Digital Camera 16437542 User Manual
Furuno Marine RADAR FR 2165DS User Manual
GE Range 49 4992 User Manual